1MRK505379-BEN C en Product Guide Line Differential Protection RED670 Version 2.2

—
R E L I O N ® 670 SERIES
Line differential protection RED670

Version 2.2
Product guide
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Line differential protection RED670 2.2
Product version: 2.2
Contents
1. Application..................................................................... 3 15. Monitoring................................................................... 47

2. Available functions........................................................10 16. Metering......................................................................49
3. Differential protection.................................................... 27 17. Human machine interface............................................50
4. Impedance protection...................................................31 18. Basic IED functions..................................................... 50
5. Wide area measurement system...................................36 19. Ethernet...................................................................... 50
6. Current protection........................................................ 36 20. Station communication ...............................................51
7. Voltage protection........................................................ 38 21. Remote communication.............................................. 52
8. Frequency protection....................................................39 22. Hardware description.................................................. 53
9. Multipurpose protection................................................39 23. Connection diagrams.................................................. 56
10. General calculation...................................................... 40 24. Technical data............................................................. 57
11. Secondary system supervision.................................... 40 25. Ordering for customized IED......................................144
12. Control........................................................................ 40 26. Ordering for pre-configured IED.................................156
13. Scheme communication..............................................42 27. Ordering for Accessories........................................... 163
14. Logic...........................................................................45
Disclaimer
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any
errors that may appear in this document. Drawings and diagrams are not binding.
© Copyright 2017 ABB.
All rights reserved.
Trademarks
ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective holders.
2 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Product version: 2.2 Issued: March 2018
Revision: C
1. Application Out of Step function is available to separate power system

M13635-3 v7
The Intelligent Electronic Device (IED) is used for the sections close to electrical centre at occurring out of step.
protection, control and monitoring of overhead lines and
cables in all types of networks. The IED can be used from The IED can be used in applications with IEC/UCA
distribution up to the highest voltage levels. It is suitable for 61850-9-2LE process bus with up to eight merging units (MU)
the protection of heavily loaded lines and multi-terminal lines depending on the other functionality included in the IED. Each
where the requirement for tripping is one-, two-, and/or three- MU has eight analog channels, four currents and four
phase. The IED is also suitable for protection of cable feeders voltages. Conventional and Merging Unit channels can be
to generator block transformers. mixed freely in the application.
The phase segregated current differential protection provides Forcing of binary inputs and outputs is a convenient way to
an excellent sensitivity for high resistive faults and gives a test wiring in substations as well as testing configuration logic
secure phase selection. The availability of six stabilized in the IEDs. Basically it means that all binary inputs and
current inputs per phase allows use on multi-breaker outputs on the IED I/O modules (BOM, BIM, IOM & SOM) can
arrangements in three terminal applications or up to five be forced to arbitrary values.
terminal applications with single breaker arrangements. The
Central Account Management is an authentication
communication between the IEDs involved in the differential
infrastructure that offers a secure solution for enforcing
scheme is based on the IEEE C37.94 standard and can be
access control to IEDs and other systems within a substation.
duplicated for important installations when required for
This incorporates management of user accounts, roles and
redundancy reasons. Charging current compensation allows
certificates and the distribution of such, a procedure
high sensitivity also on long overhead lines and cables.
completely transparent to the user.
A full scheme distance protection is included to provide
Flexible Product Naming allows the customer to use an IED-
independent protection in parallel with the differential scheme
vendor independent IEC 61850 model of the IED. This
in case of a communication channel failure for the differential
customer model will be used as the IEC 61850 data model,
scheme. The distance protection then provide protection for
but all other aspects of the IED will remain unchanged (e.g.,
the entire line including the remote end back up capability
names on the local HMI and names in the tools). This offers
either in case of a communications failure or via use of an
significant flexibility to adapt the IED to the customers'
independent communication channel to provide a fully
system and standard solution.
redundant scheme of protection (that is a second main
protection scheme). Eight channels for intertrip and other The logic is prepared with a graphical tool. The advanced
binary signals are available in the communication between the logic capability allows special applications such as automatic
IEDs. opening of disconnectors in multi-breaker arrangements,
closing of breaker rings, load transfer logics etc. The
A high impedance differential protection can be used to
graphical configuration tool ensures simple and fast testing
protect T-feeders or line reactors.
and commissioning.
The auto-reclose for single-, two- and/or three phase
A loop testing function allows complete testing including
reclosing includes priority circuits for multi-breaker
remote end IED when local IED is set in test mode.
arrangements. It co-operates with the synchronism check
M11788-3 v10
function with high-speed or delayed reclosing. Communication via optical connections ensures immunity
against disturbances.
High set instantaneous phase and earth overcurrent, four
SEMOD51220-5 v14
step directional or un-directional delayed phase and earth Four packages have been defined for the following
overcurrent, thermal overload and two step under- and applications:
overvoltage functions are examples of the available functions
allowing the user to fulfill any application requirement. • Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends (A42)
• Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-5 line ends (B33)
The IED can also be provided with a full control and • Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends (B42)
interlocking functionality including co-operation with the • Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, with distance
synchronism check function to allow integration of the main protection (C42)
or back-up control.
Optional functions are not configured but a maximum
Disturbance recording and fault locator are available to allow configuration with all optional functions are available as
independent post-fault analysis after primary disturbances. template in the application configuration tool. Analog inputs
The Disturbance recorder will also show remote station and binary input/output signals are pre-defined for basic use.
currents, as received to this IED, time compensated with Other signals may be required by each particular application.
measure communication time.
ABB 3
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Add binary I/O boards as required for the application when

ordering.
4 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Description of configuration A42

GUID-A3E1E81D-9278-4AC1-8AAA-AD0D56DABE23 v1
WA1
RED670 A42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping
WA2 12AI (6I+6U)
WA2_VT
QB1 QB2
MET UN
VN MMXU
WA1_VT
3 Control
Control
Control MET UN
SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR VN MMXU
63 71 94 1→0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC

QA1
S SIMG S SIML SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN
LINE_CT
Control
Control
Control 52PD PD 50BF 3I>BF 50 3I>> 46 Iub>
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC PDSC CC RBRF PH PIOC BRC PTOC
26 θ>
REM_CT LC PTTR
REM_VT 87L 3Id/I>

QB9 L4C PDIF
MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

QC9 V MSQI CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh MET I MET Isqi

DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR C MMXU C MSQI
LINE_VT
27 2(3U<) 27 3U< 59 2(3U>) MET UN MET U

UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV OV2 PTOV VN MMXU V MMXU
Other Functions available from the function library
87 INd/I 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>> 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<>
CCS SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC
81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV
Optional Functions
2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos

CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH OOS PPAM
Zpsl 78 Ucos 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control

PMU REP PSL PSCH PSP PPAM Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI SDEPSDE S XSWI
60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85 85 85

VD SPVC VR PVOC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH ZCLC PSCH ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH ZCV PSOF
21 Z< 68 Zpsb
ZMF PDIS ZM RPSB
IEC16000199-1-en.vsd
IEC16000199 V1 EN-US
Figure 1. Configuration diagram for configuration A42
ABB 5
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Description of configuration B33

GUID-1231CFD6-8CEF-464E-8124-E9F7EFD0FF62 v1
WA1
RED670 B33 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping
12AI (6I+6U)
QB1 WA1_VT
WA1_CT Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD MET UN
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC VN MMXU
Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD 3 Control
Control
Control
WA1_QA1
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR
REM_CT
71 63
S SIML S SIMG
WA1_QB6
LINE1_QB9 87L 87L 3Id/I>
LINE1_VT LDL PSCH LT3C PDIF Σ

QB61 V MSQI CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh

DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR
TIE_QA1 MET Isqi MET I 46 Iub> 50 3I>> 26 θ>

3I>STB
C MSQI C MMXU BRC PTOC PH PIOC LC PTTR
TIE_CT
MET U MET UN 27 3U< 27 3U< 59 3U>
V MMXU VN MMXU UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV OV2 PTOV
LINE2_VT
MET UN
QB62 VN MMXU
WA2_VT
MET UN 94
94 1→0
1→0 79
79 0→1
5(0→1) 25 SC
25 SC/VC
LINE2_QB9 SMP
VN MMXU SMPPTRC
PTRC SMB
SMBRREC
RREC SES
SESRSYN
RSYN

87 INd/I 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>> 26 Θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 3 Control
CCS SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC Q CBAY
WA2_QB6 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV
Optional Functions
2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id>
WA2_QA1 CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF
87L 3Id/I> 87L 3Id/I> 87L 3Id/I> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos

L3C PDIF L6C PDIF LT6C PDIF OEX PVPH OOS PPAM PMU REP
QB2 Zpsl 78 Ucos 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 67N IN>

PSL PSCH PSP PPAM Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI SDE PSDE
WA2
3 Control 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85
S XSWI VD SPVC VR PVOC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH ZCLC PSCH
85 85 21 Z< 68 Zpsb
ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH ZCV PSOF ZMF PDIS ZM RPSB
Figure 2. Configuration diagram for configuration B33
6 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Description of configuration B42

GUID-D1058782-6EAD-4E94-8513-1D3647E67250 v1
WA1
RED670 B42 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping
12AI (6I+6U)
QB1 WA1_VT
WA1_CT Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD MET UN
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC VN MMXU
Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD
REM_CT1 SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC 3 Control
Control
Control
WA1_QA1
SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR
REM_CT2 71 63
S SIML S SIMG
WA1_QB6 REM_VT
LINE1_QB9 87L 3Id/I>
LINE1_VT L4C PDIF Σ

QB61 V MSQI CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh

DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR
TIE_QA1 MET Isqi MET I 46 Iub> 50 3I>> 26 θ>

3I>STB
C MSQI C MMXU BRC PTOC PH PIOC LC PTTR
TIE_CT
MET U MET UN 27 3U< 27 3U< 59 3U>
V MMXU VN MMXU UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV OV2 PTOV
LINE2_VT
MET UN
QB62 WA2_VT VN MMXU
MET UN 94
94 1→0
1→0 79
79 0→1
5(0→1) 25 SC
25 SC/VC
LINE2_QB9 SMP
VN MMXU SMPPTRC
PTRC SMB
SMBRREC
RREC SES RSYN
SES RSYN

87 INd/I 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>> 26 Θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 3 Control
CCS SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC Q CBAY
WA2_QB6 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV
Optional Functions
2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id>
WA2_QA1 CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF
24 U/f> 78 Ucos Zpsl 78 Ucos 3 Control

OEX PVPH OOS PPAM PMU REP PSL PSCH PSP PPAM Q CRSV
3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<)

QB2
S CILO S CSWI SDE PSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VR PVOC
WA2 85 85 85 85
ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH ZCLC PSCH ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH ZCV PSOF
21 Z< 68 Zpsb
ZMF PDIS ZM RPSB
IEC16000251-1-en.vsdx
Figure 3. Configuration diagram for configuration B42
ABB 7
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Description of configuration C42

GUID-C82DE474-FDC4-49CF-AF12-445716D9C6B6 v1
WA1
RED670 C42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping
and back-up distance protection 12AI (6I+6U)
WA2
DFR/SER DR 21FL FL
DRP RDRE LMB RFLO
WA2_VT
QB1 QB2
MET UN
VN MMXU
WA1_VT
3 Control
Control
Control MET UN
SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR VN MMXU
63 71 94 1→0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC

QA1
S SIMG S SIML SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN
LINE_CT
Control
Control
Control 52PD PD 50BF 3I>BF 50 3I>> 46 Iub>
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC PDSC CC RBRF PH PIOC BRC PTOC
REM_CT 26 θ>
LC PTTR
REM_VT 87L 3Id/I>

QB9 L4C PDIF
MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I< 21 Z<

QC9 CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC ZMF PDIS
MET W/Varh MET I MET Isqi

ETP MMTR C MMXU C MSQI
85 85 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>)

LINE_VT EC PSCH ECRW PSCH EF PIOC EF4 PTOC
59 2(3U>) 27 2(3U<) 27 3U<

OV2 PTOV UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV
85 85 68 Zpsb
ZCRW PSCH ZC PSCH ZM RPSB ZCV PSOF
MET Usqi MET UN MET U

V MSQI VN MMXU V MMXU
87 INd/I 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 78 Ucos Zpsl Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<>
CCS SPVC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OOS PPAM PSL PSCH Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC
81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV ZCLC PSCH
Optional Functions
2(I>/U<) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos 3 Control
CV GAPC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH PMU REP PSP PPAM Q CRSV
3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

S CILO S CSWI SDEPSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VR PVOC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH
Figure 4. Configuration diagram for configuration C42
GUID-79B8BC84-4AAB-44E7-86CD-FF63098B009D v2
8 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
The basic delivery includes one binary input module and one are specific to the system, object or application. Optional
binary output module, which is sufficient for the default functions and optional IO ordered will not be configured at
configured IO to trip and close circuit breaker. All IEDs can be delivery. It should be noted that the standard only includes
reconfigured with the help of the application configuration tool one binary input and one binary output module and only the
in PCM600. The IED can be adapted to special applications key functions such as tripping are connected to the outputs
and special logic can be developed, such as logic for in the signal matrix tool. The required total IO must be
automatic opening of disconnectors and closing of ring bays, calculated and specified at ordering.
automatic load transfer from one busbar to the other, and so
on. The configurations are as far as found necessary provided
with application comments to explain why the signals have
The basic IED configuration is provided with the signal matrix, been connected in the special way. On request, ABB is
single line diagram and the application configuration prepared available to support the re-configuration work, either directly
for the functions included in the product by default. All or to do the design checking.
parameters should be verified by the customer, since these
ABB 9
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
2. Available functions
GUID-F5776DD1-BD04-4872-BB89-A0412B4B5CC3 v1
are not exposed to the user or do not need
to be configured are not described in this
The following tables list all the functions manual.
available in the IED. Those functions that
Main protection functions

GUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v13
Table 1. Example of quantities
2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)
10 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670
(Customized)
Differential protection
HZPDIF 87 High impedance differential protection, single phase 0-3 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02
REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance 0–2
L3CPDIF 87L Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line 0-1 1-A34
ends
L6CPDIF 87L Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line 0-1 1-A04
ends
LT3CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line 0-1 1
ends, in-zone transformer
LT6CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line 0-1 1-A06
ends, in-zone transformer
L4CPDIF 87L High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 0-1 1 1 1
2-3 line ends
LDLPSCH 87L Line differential protection logic 0-1 1
LDRGFC 11REL Additional security logic for differential protection 0-1
Impedance protection
ZMQPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic 0-5

ZMQAPDIS
ZDRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral 0-2
ZMCPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral 0-5

ZMCAPDIS characteristic for series compensated lines
ZDSRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series 0-2

compensation
FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with 0-2

fixed angle
ZMHPDIS 21 Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic 0-5
ZMMPDIS, 21 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for 0-5

ZMMAPDIS earth faults
ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance element for mho 0-2

characteristic
ZDARDIR Additional distance protection directional function for 0-2

earth faults
ZSMGAPC Mho impedance supervision logic 0-1
FMPSPDIS 21 Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment 0-2
ZMRPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic 0-5

ZMRAPDIS separate Ph-Ph and Ph-E settings
FRPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with 0-2

settable angle
ABB 11
1MRK 505 379-BEN C

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670
(Customized)
ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance protection, quad and mho 0-1 1–B15 1–B15 1–B15 1
characteristic
ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance protection for series comp. 0-1

lines, quad and mho characteristic
PPLPHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1
PPL2PHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1
ZMRPSB 68 Power swing detection 0-1 1-B15 1-B15 1-B15 1
PSLPSCH Power swing logic 0-1 1-B15 1-B15 1-B15 1
PSPPPAM 78 Poleslip/out-of-step protection 0-1 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22 1-B24
OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step protection 0-1 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22 1
ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and 0-1 1-B15 1-B15 1-B15 1
current based
12 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Back-up protection functions

GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v13

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670
(Customized)
Current protection
PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent 0-3 1 1 1 1

protection
OC4PTOC 51_671) Directional phase overcurrent protection, 0-3 1 1 1 1

four steps
EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrent 0-1 1 1 1 1

protection
EF4PTOC 51N Directional residual overcurrent 0-3 1 1 1 1

67N2) protection, four steps
NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative phase 0-2 1 1 1 1

sequence overcurrent protection
SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual overcurrent 0-1 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16
and power protection
LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time 0-2 1 1 1 1

constant, Celsius
LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time 0-2 1 1 1 1

constant, Fahrenheit
CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-2 2 1 2 1
STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0-2 1B 1 1B 1

1-B27 1-B27
CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-2 2 1 2 1
GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0-2 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0-2 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 1 1 1 1 1
VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent protection 0-3 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
Voltage protection
UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0-2 1 1 1 1
OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-2 1 1 1 1
ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage protection 0-2 1 1 1 1
OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation protection 0-1 1-D03 1-D03 1-D03 1-D03
VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-2 2 2 2 2
LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 1 1 1 1 1
PAPGAPC 27 Radial feeder protection 0-1
Frequency protection
ABB 13
1MRK 505 379-BEN C

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670
(Customized)
SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B

3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04
SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B

3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04
SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change of frequency protection 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B

3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04
Multipurpose protection
CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 0-4 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01
General calculation
SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6
1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage
14 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Control and monitoring functions

GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v16

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670
(Customized)
Control
SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, energizing 0-2 2 1 2 1

check and synchronizing
SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-4 2B 1B 2B 1B

2-H05 1-H04 2-H05 1-H04
APC10 3 Control functionality for a 0-1 1-H37 1-H37

single bay, max 10
objects (1CB), including
interlocking (see Table 3)
APC15 3 Control functionality for a 0-1 1-H38 1-H38

single bay, max 15
objects (2CB), including
interlocking (see Table 4)
QCBAY Bay control 1 1 1 1 1
LOCREM Handling of LR-switch 1 1 1 1 1

positions
LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1 1 1 1 1
SXCBR Circuit breaker 6 6 3 6 3
SLGAPC Logic rotating switch for 15 15 15 15 15

function selection and
LHMI presentation
VSGAPC Selector mini switch 30 30 30 30 30
DPGAPC Generic communication 16 16 16 16 16

function for Double Point
indication
SPC8GAPC Single point generic 5 5 5 5 5

control function 8 signals
AUTOBITS Automation bits, 3 3 3 3 3

command function for
DNP3.0
SINGLECMD Single command, 16 4 4 4 4 4

signals
I103CMD Function commands for 1 1 1 1 1

IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Function commands 50 50 50 50 50

generic for IEC
60870-5-103
I103POSCMD IED commands with 50 50 50 50 50

position and select for
IEC 60870-5-103
ABB 15
1MRK 505 379-BEN C

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670
(Customized)
I103POSCMDV IED direct commands 50 50 50 50 50

with position for IEC
60870-5-103
I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103
I103USRCMD Function commands user 4 4 4 4 4

defined for IEC
60870-5-103
Secondary system
supervision
CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit 0-2 2 1 2 1

supervision
FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-3 3 3 3 3
VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision 0-2 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03

based on voltage
difference
Logic
SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 12 12 12 12 12
SMAGAPC General start matrix block 12 12 12 12 12
STARTCOMB Start combinator 32 32 32 32 32
TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12 12
ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5 5 5 5
WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 5 5 5 5
INDCALH Logic for group indication 5 5 5 5 5
AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic 40-420 40-420 40-420 40-420 40-420
LLD, OR, blocks (see Table 2)
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR
ANDQT, Configurable logic blocks 0-1

INDCOMBSPQT, Q/T (see Table 5)
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT
16 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670
(Customized)
AND, GATE, INV, Extension logic package 0-1

LLD, OR, (see Table 6)
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET,
VSGAPC, XOR
FXDSIGN Fixed signal function 1 1 1 1 1

block
B16I Boolean to integer 18 18 18 18 18

conversion, 16 bit
BTIGAPC Boolean to integer 16 16 16 16 16

conversion with logical
node representation, 16
bit
IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 18 18 18 18 18

conversion
ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 16 16 16 16 16

conversion with Logic
Node representation
TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator 12 12 12 12 12

with limit transgression
and overflow supervision
INTCOMP Comparator for integer 30 30 30 30 30

inputs
REALCOMP Comparator for real 30 30 30 30 30

inputs
Table 2. Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks
Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 280
GATE 40
INV 420
LLD 40
OR 320
PULSETIMER 40
RSMEMORY 40
SRMEMORY 40
TIMERSET 60
XOR 40
ABB 17
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 3. Number of function instances in APC10
Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 10
BB_ES 3
A1A2_BS 2
A1A2_DC 3
ABC_BC 1
BH_CONN 1
BH_LINE_A 1
BH_LINE_B 1
DB_BUS_A 1
DB_BUS_B 1
DB_LINE 1
ABC_LINE 1
AB_TRAFO 1
SCSWI Switch controller 10
SXSWI Circuit switch 9
QCRSV Apparatus control 2
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 10
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching device via 12

GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a switching 12

device
18 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 4. Number of function instances in APC15
Function name Function description Total number of instances
SCILO Interlocking 15
BB_ES 3
A1A2_BS 2
A1A2_DC 3
ABC_BC 1
BH_CONN 1
BH_LINE_A 1
BH_LINE_B 1
DB_BUS_A 1
DB_BUS_B 1
DB_LINE 1
ABC_LINE 1
AB_TRAFO 1
SCSWI Switch controller 15
SXSWI Circuit switch 14
QCRSV Apparatus control 2
RESIN1 1
RESIN2 59
POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 15
XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching device via 20

GOOSE
GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a switching 20

device
Table 5. Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T
Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances
ANDQT 120
INDCOMBSPQT 20
INDEXTSPQT 20
INVALIDQT 22
INVERTERQT 120
ORQT 120
PULSETIMERQT 40
RSMEMORYQT 40
SRMEMORYQT 40
TIMERSETQT 40
XORQT 40
ABB 19
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 6. Total number of instances for extended logic package
Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances
AND 180
GATE 49
INV 180
LLD 49
OR 180
PULSETIMER 89
RSMEMORY 40
SLGAPC 74
SRMEMORY 130
TIMERSET 109
VSGAPC 120
XOR 89
20 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670
(Customized)
Monitoring
CVMMXN Power system 6 6 6 6 6

measurement
CMMXU Current measurement 10 10 10 10 10
VMMXU Voltage measurement 6 6 6 6 6

phase-phase
CMSQI Current sequence 6 6 6 6 6

measurement
VMSQI Voltage sequence 6 6 6 6 6

measurement
VNMMXU Voltage measurement 6 6 6 6 6

phase-earth
EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20 20
DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1 1 1 1 1

A4RADR,
SPGAPC Generic communication 64 64 64 64 64

function for Single Point
indication
SP16GAPC Generic communication 16 16 16 16 16

function for Single Point
indication 16 inputs
MVGAPC Generic communication 24 24 24 24 24

function for measured
values
BINSTATREP Logical signal status report 3 3 3 3 3
RANGE_XP Measured value expander 66 66 66 66 66

block
SSIMG 63 Insulation supervision for 21 21 21 21 21

gas medium
SSIML 71 Insulation supervision for 3 3 3 3 3

liquid medium
SSCBR Circuit breaker condition 0-6 6 3 6 3

monitoring
LMBRFLO Fault locator 1 1 1 1 1
I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103
I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined 3 3 3 3 3

signals for IEC
60870-5-103
I103AR Function status auto- 1 1 1 1 1

recloser for IEC
60870-5-103
ABB 21
1MRK 505 379-BEN C

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670
(Customized)
I103EF Function status earth-fault 1 1 1 1 1

for IEC 60870-5-103
I103FLTPROT Function status fault 1 1 1 1 1

protection for IEC
60870-5-103
I103IED IED status for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103
I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103
I103USRDEF Status for user defined 20 20 20 20 20

signals for IEC
60870-5-103
L4UFCNT Event counter with limit 30 30 30 30 30

supervision
TEILGAPC Running hour meter 6 6 6 6 6
Metering
PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16 16 16 16
ETPMMTR Function for energy 6 6 6 6 6

calculation and demand
handling
22 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Communication
GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v16

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670
(Customized)
Station communication
LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1
ADE LON communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1
HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1 1 1 1 1
DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1 1 1 1 1
MST1TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1

MST2TCP,
MST3TCP, MST4TCP
IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850 1 1 1 1 1
GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for 59 59 59 59 59

interlocking
GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 16 16 16 16
GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a double 64 64 64 64 64

point value
GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an integer 32 32 32 32 32

value
GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 60 60 60 60 60

measurand value
GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single 64 64 64 64 64

point value
MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and transmit 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10
MULTICMDSND
OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial 1 1 1 1 1

communication
RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication for 1 1 1 1 1

RS485
AGSAL Generic security application component 1 1 1 1 1
LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1 1 1 1
LPHD Physical device information 1 1 1 1 1
PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1 1 1 1 1
FSTACCS Field service tool access 1 1 1 1 1
IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus 0-1 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30

communication, 8 merging units
ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1 1 1 1 1
ALTRK Service tracking 1 1 1 1 1
ABB 23
1MRK 505 379-BEN C

function name
RED670 (C42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670 (B42)
RED670 (A42)
RED670
(Customized)
PRP IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol 0-1 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23
HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless 0-1 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24
redundancy
PMUCONF, Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors (see 0-1 1-P32 1-P32 1-P32 1-P32
PMUREPORT, Table 7)
PHASORREPORT1,
ANALOGREPORT1
BINARYREPORT1,
SMAI1 - SMAI12
3PHSUM
PMUSTATUS
PTP Precision time protocol 1 1 1 1 1
SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for non-redundant 6 6 6 6 6

Ethernet port
RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for redundant 3 3 3 3 3

Ethernet ports
QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 96 96 96 96 96
Remote communication
BinSignRec1_1 Binary signal transfer receive 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6
BinSignRec1_2
BinSignReceive2
Scheme communication
ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic with delta 0-2 1-B15 1-B15 1-B15 1
based blocking scheme signal transmit
ZC1PPSCH 85 Phase segregated scheme communication 0-2 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05
logic for distance protection
ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic 0-2 1-B15 1-B15 1-B15 1
for distance protection
ZC1WPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic 0-2 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05
for phase segregated communication
ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 0-1 1-B15 1-B15 1-B15 1
ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for residual 0-1 1-C34 1-C34 1-C34 1
overcurrent protection
ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic 0-1 1-C34 1-C34 1-C34 1
for residual overcurrent protection
DTT Direct transfer trip 0-1
24 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 7. Number of function instances in Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors
Function name Function description Number of instances
PMUCONF Configuration parameters for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1
PMUREPORT Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 1
PHASORREPORT1 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, phasors 1-8 1
ANALOGREPORT1 Protocol reporting of analog data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, analogs 1-8 1
BINARYREPORT1 Protocol reporting of binary data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, binary 1-8 1
SMAI1–SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs 1
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 6
PMUSTATUS Diagnostics for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1
ABB 25
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Basic IED functions

GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v13
Table 8. Basic IED functions
IEC 61850 or function Description

name
INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list
TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module
BININPUT, SYNCHCAN, Time synchronization

SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH,
SYNCHPPS, SNTP,
SYNCHSPA
TIMEZONE Time synchronization
IRIG-B Time synchronization
SETGRPS Number of setting groups
ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups
TESTMODE Test mode functionality
CHNGLCK Change lock function
SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs
SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs
SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs
SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs
3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase
ATHSTAT Authority status
ATHCHCK Authority check
AUTHMAN Authority management
FTPACCS FTP access with password
ALTMS Time master supervision
ALTIM Time management
COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic
26 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 9. Local HMI functions
IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description

name
LHMICTRL Local HMI signals
LANGUAGE Local human machine language
SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior
FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600

FNKEYMD1–
FNKEYMD5
LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI
OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys
GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module

GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15
3. Differential protection REFPDIF can also protect autotransformers. Five currents are
measured at the most complicated configuration as shown in
High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF Figure 5.
M13071-3 v13
High impedance differential protection, single phase (HZPDIF)
functions can be used when the involved CT cores have the CT CT
YNdx
same turns ratio and similar magnetizing characteristics. It CT CB CB
utilizes an external CT secondary current summation by Y d

CB CB
wiring. Actually all CT secondary circuits which are involved in
Autotransformer
the differential scheme are connected in parallel. External CT
IED
series resistor, and a voltage dependent resistor which are
both mounted externally to the IED, are also required.
The most typical CT CB CB CT
The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED application
The most complicated
accessories in the Product Guide. application - autotransformer
HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars, IEC05000058-2 V1 EN-US
Figure 5. Examples of applications of the REFPDIF

reactors, motors, auto-transformers, capacitor banks and so
on. One such function block is used for a high-impedance
restricted earth fault protection. Three such function blocks
are used to form three-phase, phase-segregated differential High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line
protection. ends L4CPDIF
GUID-57872A74-462D-4513-B75B-A46ADCE03522 v2
High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line
Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF ends (L4CPDIF) is a unit type protection system with typical
M13047-3 v19
Restricted earth-fault protection, low-impedance function operate time less than one cycle. These types of systems are
(REFPDIF) can be used on all directly or low-impedance suitable for the protection of complex transmission network
earthed windings. The REFPDIF function provides high configurations because they exhibit good performance during
sensitivity and high speed tripping as it protects each winding evolving, inter-circuit, and cross-country faults. They are also
separately and thus does not need inrush stabilization. highly immune to power swings, mutual coupling and series
impedance unbalances. High speed line differential protection
The REFPDIF function is a percentage biased function with an
requires 2 Mbit/s communication channel to transfer analog
additional zero sequence current directional comparison
signals.
criterion. This gives excellent sensitivity and stability during
through faults.
ABB 27
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
The L4CPDIF function applies the Kirchhoff's law, and principle supplemented by an additional advanced internal
compares currents entering and leaving the protected multi- fault detector. This results in fast protection with very high
end circuit consisting of overhead power lines and cables. dependability (relay operates correctly with faults it was
Under normal load conditions, the sum of currents is small or designed for) and very high security (relay does not operate
close to zero. The function is phase-segregated: each phase with faults it was not designed for).
has its own differential, bias and incremental currents.
Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF
M14917-3 v7
L4CPDIF measures currents at all ends of a protected circuit. Line differential protection applies the Kirchhoff's law and
At each physical end, currents are mostly measured by one compares the currents entering and leaving the protected
and sometimes by two three-phase current transformer (CT) multi-terminal circuit, consisting of overhead power lines and
groups. The voltages at all ends are also measured if the cables. Under the condition that there are no in-line or tap
exact method is selected for charging current compensation. (shunt) power transformers within the zone of protection, it
The protected zone is determined by the positions of the CTs offers a phase segregated fundamental frequency current
at all ends of the protected circuit. L4CPDIF protects all based differential protection with high sensitivity and provides
electrical equipment, such as power lines, circuit breakers phase selection information for single-pole tripping
and small tap transformers, that are within the protected
zone. L3CPDIF is used for conventional two-terminal lines with or
without a 1½ circuit breaker arrangement in one end, as well
The information on all locally measured currents is transmitted as three-terminal lines with single breaker arrangements at all
via communication channels to remote IEDs. Then L4CPDIF terminals.
compares these currents using a classical current differential
Protected zone
IED Communication channel IED
Figure 6. Example of application on a conventional two-terminal line
L6CPDIF is used for conventional two-terminal lines with 1½

circuit breaker arrangements in both ends, as well as multi-
terminal lines with up to five terminals.
Protected zone
IED Comm. Channel IED
Comm. Channel Comm. Channel

IED
IEC05000040_2_en.vsd
Figure 7. Example of application on a three-terminal line with 1½ breaker arrangements
The current differential algorithm provides high sensitivity for giving a secure through-fault stability even with heavily
internal faults and it has excellent stability for external faults. saturated CTs. In addition to the restrained evaluation, an
Current samples from all CTs are exchanged between the unrestrained (instantaneous) high differential current setting
IEDs in the line ends (master-master mode) or sent to one IED can be used for fast tripping of internal faults with very high
(master-slave mode) for evaluation. currents.
A restrained dual biased slope evaluation is made where the A special feature with this function is that applications with
bias current is the highest phase current in any line end, small power transformers (rated current less than 50% of the
28 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
differential current setting IdMin) connected as line taps (that achieve coordination with downstream overcurrent IEDs. The
is, as shunt power transformers), without measurements of local protection of the small tap power transformer is given
currents in the tap, can be handled. The normal load current the time needed to disconnect the faulty transformer.
is considered to be negligible, and special measures must be
taken in the event of a short circuit on the LV side of the A line charging current compensation provides increased
transformer. In this application, the tripping of the differential sensitivity of line differential protection.
protection can be time-delayed for low differential currents to
transformers are correctly represented with vector group

Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in-zone compensations made in the algorithm. The function includes
transformers LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF
M14932-3 v9 2nd and 5 th harmonic restraint and zero-sequence current
Two two-winding power transformers or one three-winding
elimination. The phase-segregated differential protection with
power transformer can be included in the line differential
single-pole tripping is usually not possible in such
protection zone. In such application, the differential protection
applications.
is based on the ampere turns balance between the
transformer windings. Both two- and three-winding
Protected zone
IED Comm. Channel IED
Comm. Channel Comm. Channel
IED
IEC05000042_2_en.vsd
Figure 8. Example of application on a three-terminal line with an in-line power transformer in the protection zone
for the differential function appears automatically when the

Analog signal transfer for line differential protection setting Operation for the differential function is set to Off.
M13647-3 v8
The line differential protection function can be arranged as a
master-master system or a master-slave system alternatively.
In the former, current samples are exchanged between all For line differential protection we
IEDs, and an evaluation is made in each IED. This means that recommend that all feeder ends use the
a 64 kbits/s or 2 Mbit/s communication channel is needed same version of RED670 and the line data
between every IED included in the same line differential communication module LDCM. The line
protection zone. In the latter, current samples are sent from differential protection in the latest version of
all slave IEDs to one master IED where the evaluation is RED670 is compatible with older versions
made, and trip signals are sent to the remote ends when of RED670. Older versions than 670 1.2.3
needed. In this system, a 64 kbits/s or 2 Mbit/s must be verified with ABB.
communication channel is only needed between the master
and each one of the slave IEDs. The Master-Slave condition
ABB 29
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Protected zone
IED IED
Comm.
Channels
IED IED IED
IEC0500043_2_en.vsd
Figure 9. Five terminal lines with master-master system
Protected zone
RED RED
670 670
Comm.
Channels
RED RED RED

670 670 670
en05000044.vsd
Figure 10. Five terminal line with master-slave system
Current samples from IEDs located geographically apart from The communication link is continuously monitored, and an
each other, must be time coordinated so that the current automatic switchover to a standby link is possible after a
differential algorithm can be executed correctly, this is done preset time.
with the echo method. For applications where transmit and
receive times can differ, the optional built-in GPS receivers
can be used.
Zero sequence criterion takes the zero sequence current as

Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC input. It increases the security of protection during the high
GUID-8F918A08-E50E-4E7B-BDCA-FF0B5534B289 v3
Additional security logic for differential protection (LDRGFC) impedance fault conditions.
can help the security of the protection especially when the
communication system is in abnormal status or for example Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages and phase-to-
when there is unspecified asymmetry in the communication phase voltages as inputs. It increases the security of
link. It helps to reduce the probability for mal-operation of the protection when the three-phase fault occurred on the weak
protection. LDRGFC is more sensitive than the main end side.
protection logic to always release operation for all faults
detected by the differential function. LDRGFC consists of four Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputs and
sub functions: it increases the dependability during the switch onto fault
case of unloaded line.
• Phase-to-phase current variation
• Zero sequence current criterion The differential function can be allowed to trip as no load is
• Low voltage criterion fed through the line and protection is not working correctly.
• Low current criterion
Features:
Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current samples
as input and it calculates the variation using the sampling
value based algorithm. Phase-to-phase current variation
function is major one to fulfill the objectives of the startup
element.
30 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
• Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the • It is possible to block the each sub function of startup
abnormal status of the protected system element
• Startup element does not influence the operation speed • Startup signal has a settable pulse time
of main protection
• Startup element would detect the evolving faults, high
impedance faults and three phase fault on weak side
4. Impedance protection The distance protection zones can operate independently of

each other in directional (forward or reverse) or non-
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS different communication schemes, for the protection of power
M13787-3 v15
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending on lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as
product variant) zone full scheme protection function with parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.
three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault
loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of the independent Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for
zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS
SEMOD168173-4 v11
reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-up protection The line distance protection is an up to five (depending on
for transformer connected to overhead lines and cables of product variant) zone full scheme protection with three fault
different types and lengths. loops for phase-to-phase faults and three fault loops for
phase-to-earth fault for each of the independent zones.
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach
(ZMQPDIS) together with Phase selection with load give flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of different
encroachment (FDPSPDIS) has functionality for load types and lengths.
encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect high
resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in figure 11. Quadrilateral characteristic is available.
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for

X series compensated lines (ZMCPDIS) function has
functionality for load encroachment which increases the
Forward possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded
operation lines.
Forward
R
operation
Reverse
operation
R
en05000034.vsd
Reverse
Figure 11. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with
operation
Phase selection with load encroachment function
FDPSPDIS activated
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault en05000034.vsd

loop together with a sensitive and reliable built-in phase
Figure 12. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with load
selection makes the function suitable in applications with encroachment function activated
single-phase autoreclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents The independent measurement of impedance for each fault
overreaching of zone 1 at load exporting end at phase-to- loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase
earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.
ABB 31
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
selection makes the function suitable in applications with The independent measurement of impedance for each fault
single phase auto-reclosing. loop together with a sensitive and reliable phase selection
makes the function suitable in applications with single phase
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the autoreclosing.
quadrilateral function prevents overreaching of zone1 at load
exporting end at phase to earth-faults on heavily loaded Built-in selectable zone timer logic is also provided in the
power lines. function.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of Adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents overreaching
each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non- at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines, see
directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with Figure 13.
different communication schemes, for the protection of power
lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as
jX
parallel lines, multi-terminal lines.
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle

FDPSPDIS Operation area Operation area
M13139-3 v9
The operation of transmission networks today is in many
cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental
considerations, the rate of expansion and reinforcement of
R
the power system is reduced, for example, difficulties to get
permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurately
Operation area
and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that single
pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an
No operation area No operation area
important role in this matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral
characteristic with fixed angle (FDPSPDIS) is designed to
accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance function IEC07000117 V2 EN-US
dependent on the fault type. Figure 13. Load encroachment influence on the offset mho
characteristic
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission
networks may make fault resistance coverage difficult to
achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS has a built-in algorithm for The distance protection zones can operate, independent of
load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-
resistive setting of both the phase selection and the directional mode (offset). This makes them suitable, together
measuring zones without interfering with the load. with different communication schemes, for the protection of
power lines and cables in complex network configurations,
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines and so on.
also important information about faulty phase(s), which can
be used for fault analysis. The possibility to use the phase-to-earth quadrilateral
impedance characteristic together with the mho characteristic
A current-based phase selection is also included. The increases the possibility to overcome eventual lack of
measuring elements continuously measure three phase sensitivity of the mho element due to the shaping of the curve
currents and the residual current and, compare them with the at remote end faults.
set values.
The integrated control and monitoring functions offer effective
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic solutions for operating and monitoring all types of
ZMHPDIS transmission and sub-transmission lines.
SEMOD175459-4 v12
The numerical mho line distance protection is an up to five
(depending on product variant) zone full scheme protection of Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults
short circuit and earth faults. ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS
SEMOD154544-4 v7
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending on
The zones have fully independent measuring and settings, product variant) zone full scheme protection function with
which gives high flexibility for all types of lines. three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each of the
independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive
The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is
and reactive reach give flexibility for use on overhead lines
suitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines and multi-
and cables of different types and lengths.
terminal lines where the requirement for tripping is one-, two-
and/or three-pole. The Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth
fault functions have functionality for load encroachment,
32 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
which increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults SEMOD153825-5 v7
on heavily loaded lines , see Figure 14. The ability to accurately and reliably classify different types of
fault so that single phase tripping and autoreclosing can be
used plays an important roll in today's power systems.
X
The phase selection function is design to accurately select
the proper fault loop(s) in the distance function dependent on
Forward
the fault type.
operation
networks may in some cases interfere with the distance
protection zone reach and cause unwanted operation.
Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load
R encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the
resistive setting of the measuring zones without interfering
with the load.
Reverse
operation
The output signals from the phase selection function produce
important information about faulty phase(s), which can be
used for fault analysis as well.
en05000034.vsd
Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic separate Ph-
Figure 14. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with Ph and Ph-E settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS
GUID-014501E7-EE0D-440F-8DC8-C44B848E49D3 v3
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with The line distance protection is up to five zone full scheme
settable angle function FRPSPDIS activated protection with three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and
three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each of the
independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault
resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use as back-up
loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in phase
protection for transformer connected to overhead lines and
selection makes the function suitable in applications with
cables of different types and lengths.
single phase auto-reclosing.
Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of
each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non- Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic
directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with (ZMRPDIS) together with Phase selection, quadrilateral
different communication schemes, for the protection of power characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS) has
lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as functionality for load encroachment, which increases the
parallel lines, multi-terminal lines. possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded
lines, as shown in figure 15.
Directional impedance element for Mho characteristic
ZDMRDIR
SEMOD175532-4 v2
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be optionally
supervised by a phase unselective directional function (phase
unselective, because it is based on symmetrical components).
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC

SEMOD153843-5 v3
The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC) includes
features for fault inception detection and high SIR detection.
It also includes the functionality for loss of potential logic as
well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.
ZSMGAPC can mainly be decomposed in two different parts:
1. A fault inception detection logic

2. High SIR detection logic
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment

FMPSPDIS
ABB 33
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives

X also important information about faulty phase(s) which can be
used for fault analysis.
Forward
A current-based phase selection is also included. The
operation
measuring elements continuously measure three phase
currents and the residual current and, compare them with the
set values.
High speed distance protection, quadrilateral and mho

R ZMFPDIS
GUID-2E34AB7F-886E-499F-8984-09041A89238D v8
The high speed distance protection (ZMFPDIS) provides a
Reverse sub-cycle, down towards a half-cycle operate time. Its six
operation zone, full scheme protection concept is entirely suitable in
applications with single-phase autoreclosing.
Each measurement zone is designed with the flexibility to

en05000034.vsd
operate in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic mode.
Figure 15. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with This can even be decided separate for the phase-to-ground
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with or phase-to-phase loops. The six zones can operate either
settable angle function FRPSPDIS activated independent of each other, or their start can be linked (per
zone) through the phase selector or the first starting zone.
This can provide fast operate times for evolving faults.
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault
loop together with a sensitive and reliable built-in phase The operation of the phase-selection is primarily based on a
selection makes the function suitable in applications with current change criteria (i.e. delta quantities), however there is
single pole tripping and autoreclosing. also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which
bases its operation on voltage and current phasors
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents
exclusively. Additionally the directional element provides a
overreaching of zone 1 at load exporting end at phase-to-
fast and correct directional decision under difficult operating
earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.
conditions, including close-in three-phase faults,
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-
each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non- feed. During phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power
directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with lines there is an adaptive load compensation algorithm that
different communication schemes, for the protection of power prevents overreaching of the distance zones in the load
lines and cables in complex network configurations, such as exporting end, improving the selectivity of the function. This
parallel lines, multi-terminal lines and so on. also reduces underreach in the importing end.
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable High speed distance protection for series comp. lines, quad
angle FRPSPDIS and mho characteristic ZMFCPDIS
GUID-C5C1ADD8-50A5-4485-848C-77D2222B56DC v7
GUID-09D0E480-C003-424E-BECD-A82BCB0052CD v1
The operation of transmission networks today is in many The high speed distance protection (ZMFCPDIS) provides a
cases close to the stability limit. Due to environmental sub-cycle, down towards a half-cycle operate time. Its six
considerations, the rate of expansion and reinforcement of zone, full scheme protection concept is entirely suitable in
the power system is reduced for example, difficulties to get applications with single-phase autoreclosing.
permission to build new power lines. The ability to accurately
High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS is fundamentally
and reliably classify the different types of fault, so that single
the same function as ZMFPDIS but provides more flexibility in
pole tripping and autoreclosing can be used plays an
zone settings to suit more complex applications, such as
important role in this matter. The phase selection function is
series compensated lines. In operation for series
designed to accurately select the proper fault loop in the
compensated networks, the parameters of the directional
distance function dependent on the fault type.
function are altered to handle voltage reversal.
Each measurement zone is designed with the flexibility to
networks may make fault resistance coverage difficult to
operate in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic mode.
achieve. Therefore, the function has a built in algorithm for
This can even be decided separate for the phase-to-ground
load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the
or phase-to-phase loops. The six zones can operate either
resistive setting of both the phase selection and the
independent of each other, or their start can be linked (per
measuring zones without interfering with the load.
34 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
zone) through the phase selector or the first starting zone. GUID-BF2F7D4C-F579-4EBD-9AFC-7C03296BD5D4 v8
This can provide fast operate times for evolving faults. The out-of-step protection (OOSPPAM ) function in the IED
can be used for both generator protection and as well for line
The operation of the phase-selection is primarily based on a protection applications.
current change criteria (i.e. delta quantities), however there is
also a phase selection criterion operating in parallel which The main purpose of the OOSPPAM function is to detect,
bases its operation on voltage and current phasors evaluate, and take the required action during pole slipping
exclusively. Additionally the directional element provides a occurrences in the power system.
fast and correct directional decision under difficult operating
The OOSPPAM function detects pole slip conditions and trips
conditions, including close-in three-phase faults,
the generator as fast as possible, after the first pole-slip if the
simultaneous faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-
center of oscillation is found to be in zone 1, which normally
feed.
includes the generator and its step-up power transformer. If
During phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines the center of oscillation is found to be further out in the power
there is an adaptive load compensation algorithm that system, in zone 2, more than one pole-slip is usually allowed
prevents overreaching of the distance zones in the load before the generator-transformer unit is disconnected. A
exporting end, improving the selectivity of the function. This parameter setting is available to take into account the circuit
also reduces underreach in the importing end. breaker opening time. If there are several out-of-step relays in
the power system, then the one which finds the center of
Power swing detection ZMRPSB oscillation in its zone 1 should operate first.
M13873-3 v12
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads
or trip of big generation plants. Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in
OOSPPAM function to allow the direct connection of two
Power swing detection function (ZMRPSB ) is used to detect groups of three-phase currents; that may be needed for very
power swings and initiate block of all distance protection powerful generators, with stator windings split into two
zones. Occurrence of earth-fault currents during a power groups per phase, when each group is equipped with current
swing inhibits the ZMRPSB function, to allow fault clearance. transformers. The protection function performs a simple
summation of the currents of the two channels I3P1 and
Power swing logic PSLPSCH I3P2.
SEMOD131350-4 v4
Power Swing Logic (PSLPSCH) is a complementary function
to Power Swing Detection (ZMRPSB) function. It provides Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ
SEMOD153619-5 v3
possibility for selective tripping of faults on power lines during The optional phase preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is used with
system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when the the ZMQPDIS and FDPSPDIS distance protection. The main
distance protection function should normally be blocked. The purpose of this function is to provide a selective tripping for
complete logic consists of two different parts: cross-country faults in isolated or high impedance-earthed
networks.
• Communication and tripping part: provides selective
tripping on the basis of special distance protection Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ
GUID-39785DEB-E5D7-447C-977B-9E940CA8E774 v1
zones and a scheme communication logic, which are not The Phase preference logic function (PPL2PHIZ) is used with
blocked during the system oscillations. the high speed distance protection, quad and mho
• Blocking part: blocks unwanted operation of characteristic (ZMFPDIS). It is intended to be used in isolated
instantaneous distance protection zone 1 for oscillations, or high impedance earthed networks where there is a
which are initiated by faults and their clearing on the requirement to operate on only one of the faulty lines during a
adjacent power lines and other primary elements. cross-country fault. It can be used without preference to
restrain operation for single earth faults with a delayed zero-
sequence current release.
Pole slip protection PSPPPAM
SEMOD143246-17 v7
Sudden events in an electric power system such as large For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or
changes in load, fault occurrence or fault clearance, can lagging phase-earth loop for measurement. It initiates
cause power oscillations referred to as power swings. In a operation on the preferred fault based on the selected phase
non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so preference. A number of different phase preference
severe that the synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as combinations are available for selection.
pole slipping. The main purpose of the pole slip protection
(PSPPPAM) is to detect, evaluate, and take the required PPL2PHIZ provides an additional phase selection criteria,
action for pole slipping occurrences in the power system. namely under voltage criteria, suitable for cross-country
faults. In radial networks, where there is no fault current in the
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM phase with the external fault, current or impedance based
phase selection methods become ineffective. Hence, only
voltage can be used for phase selection. The phase selection
ABB 35
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
result will be the same for all bays on a bus since the voltage There are settings for Phasor type (positive sequence,
is the same, which is an important condition for operating negative sequence or zero sequence in case of 3-phase
with phase preference. phasor and L1, L2 or L3 in case of single phase phasor),
PMU's Service class (Protection or Measurement), Phasor
In meshed and stronger networks, it is difficult to find representation (polar or rectangular) and the data types for
appropriate under-voltage or phase selection settings. If phasor data, analog data and frequency data.
PPL2PHIZ is unable to detect both faulty phases, then it is
not possible to provide preference. The distance protection Synchrophasor data can be reported to up to 8 clients over
will still be released however, without preference. The final TCP and/or 6 UDP group clients for multicast or unicast
result might be that both faulty feeders are operated. In other transmission of phasor data from the IED. More information
words, operation is prioritized over strict adherence to regarding synchrophasor communication structure and
preference. TCP/UDP configuration is available in Application Manual
under section C37.118 Phasor Measurement Data Streaming
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based Protocol Configuration.
ZCVPSOF
M13829-3 v4
Automatic switch onto fault logic (ZCVPSOF) is a function that Multiple PMU functionality can be configured in the IED,
gives an instantaneous trip at closing of breaker onto a fault. which can stream out same or different data at different
A dead line detection check is provided to activate the reporting rates or different performance (service) classes.
function when the line is dead.
6. Current protection
5. Wide area measurement system
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC
M12910-3 v14
Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors The instantaneous three phase overcurrent (PHPIOC) function
GUID-7539462D-A3D6-492D-9926-E67C5B7C72D9 v1
has a low transient overreach and short tripping time to allow
Configuration parameters for IEEE1344 and C37.118 protocol use as a high set short-circuit protection function.
PMUCONF
GUID-33694C62-A109-4D8F-9063-CEFA5D0E78BC v4
The IED supports the following IEEE synchrophasor Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps
standards: OC4PTOC
M12846-3 v17
• IEEE 1344-1995 (Both measurements and data Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps
communication) (OC4PTOC) has an inverse or definite time delay for each
• IEEE Std C37.118-2005 (Both measurements and data step.
communication)
• IEEE Std C37.118.1–2011 and C37.118.1a-2014 All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are available
(Measurements) together with an optional user defined time characteristic.
• IEEE Std C37.118.2-2011 (Data communication)
The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage
polarized with memory. The function can be set to be
PMUCONF contains the PMU configuration parameters for directional or non-directional independently for each of the
both IEEE C37.118 and IEEE 1344 protocols. This means all steps.
the required settings and parameters in order to establish and
define a number of TCP and/or UDP connections with one or A second harmonic blocking level can be set for the function
more PDC clients (synchrophasor client). This includes port and can be used to block each step individually.
numbers, TCP/UDP IP addresses, and specific settings for
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC
IEEE C37.118 as well as IEEE 1344 protocols. M12701-3 v16
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection (EFPIOC)
Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 PMUREPORT has a low transient overreach and short tripping times to
GUID-8DF29209-252A-4E51-9F4A-B14B669E71AB v4
The phasor measurement reporting block moves the phasor allow the use for instantaneous earth-fault protection, with the
calculations into an IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 reach limited to less than the typical eighty percent of the line
synchrophasor frame format. The PMUREPORT block at minimum source impedance. EFPIOC is configured to
contains parameters for PMU performance class and measure the residual current from the three-phase current
reporting rate, the IDCODE and Global PMU ID, format of the inputs and can be configured to measure the current from a
data streamed through the protocol, the type of reported separate current input.
synchrophasors, as well as settings for reporting analog and
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps
digital signals.
EF4PTOC
M13667-3 v19
The message generated by the PMUREPORT function block Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps
is set in accordance with the IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE 1344 (EF4PTOC) can be used as main protection for phase-to-
standards. earth faults. It can also be used to provide a system back-up,
36 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
for example, in the case of the primary protection being out of the fault current is almost independent on the fault location in
service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit the network. The protection can be selected to use either the
failure. residual current or residual power component 3U0·3I0·cos j,
for operating quantity with maintained short circuit capacity.
EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay independent There is also available one nondirectional 3I0 step and one
for each step. 3U0 overvoltage tripping step.
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are available No specific sensitive current input is needed. Sensitive
together with an optional user-defined characteristic. directional residual overcurrent and power protection
(SDEPSDE) can be set as low 0.25% of IBase.
EF4PTOC can be set to be directional or non-directional
independently for each step. Thermal overload protection, one time constant LCPTTR/
LFPTTR
IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be either M12020-4 v14
The increasing utilization of the power system closer to the
zero sequence or negative sequence.
thermal limits has generated a need of a thermal overload
A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for each protection for power lines.
step.
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other
Directional operation can be combined together with the protection functions and the introduction of the thermal
corresponding communication logic in permissive or blocking overload protection can allow the protected circuit to operate
teleprotection scheme. The current reversal and weak-end closer to the thermal limits.
infeed functionality are available as well.
The three-phase current measuring protection has an I2 t
The residual current can be calculated by summing the three- characteristic with settable time constant and a thermal
phase currents or taking the input from the neutral CT. memory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsius or
Fahrenheit, depending on whether the function used is
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent Thermal overload protection (LCPTTR) (Celsius) or (LFPTTR)
protection NS4PTOC (Fahrenheit).
GUID-485E9D36-0032-4559-9204-101539A32F47 v6
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent
protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or definite time delay An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take
independent for each step separately. action well before the line is tripped.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated time to
together with an optional user defined characteristic. reclose after operation are presented.
The directional function is voltage polarized. Breaker failure protection CCRBRF

M11550-6 v17
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast backup
NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional tripping of the surrounding breakers in case the own breaker
independently for each of the steps. fails to open. CCRBRF can be current-based, contact-based
or an adaptive combination of these two conditions.
NS4PTOC can be used as main protection for unsymmetrical
fault; phase-phase short circuits, phase-phase-earth short A current check with extremely short reset time is used as
circuits and single phase earth faults. check criterion to achieve high security against unwanted
operation.
NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system backup for
example, in the case of the primary protection being out of Contact check criteria can be used where the fault current
service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit through the breaker is small.
failure.
CCRBRF can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use
Directional operation can be combined together with with single phase tripping applications. For the three-phase
corresponding communication logic in permissive or blocking version of CCRBRF the current criteria can be set to operate
teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for directional zero only if two out of four for example, two phases or one phase
sequence current can be used. Current reversal and weak- plus the residual current start. This gives a higher security to
end infeed functionality are available. the back-up trip command.
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a single- or
protection SDEPSDE three-phase re-trip of its own breaker to avoid unnecessary
SEMOD171438-5 v6
In isolated networks or in networks with high impedance tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect initiation due
earthing, the earth fault current is significantly smaller than to mistakes during testing.
the short circuit currents. In addition to this, the magnitude of
ABB 37
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic is also

Stub protection STBPTOC available within the function in order to provide functionality
M12902-3 v10
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance for overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal-in.
and the line disconnector is opened in multi-breaker
arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be outside
on the disconnected part. The primary line distance 7. Voltage protection
protection will thus not be able to operate and must be
Two-step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
blocked. M13789-3 v12
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or
The stub protection (STBPTOC) covers the zone between the abnormal conditions. The two-step undervoltage protection
current transformers and the open disconnector. The three- function (UV2PTUV) can be used to open circuit breakers to
phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a prepare for system restoration at power outages or as a long-
normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line time delayed back-up to the primary protection.
disconnector.
UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC time delay.
M13269-3 v15
An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence
It has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to the system
currents which cause thermal stress on rotating machines
service voltage.
and can cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or
negative sequence current functions. Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
M13798-3 v16
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during abnormal
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a
conditions such as sudden power loss, tap changer
situation. If the situation persists the surrounding breakers
regulating failures, and open line ends on long lines.
should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.
Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) function can be
The Pole discordance protection function (CCPDSC) operates
used to detect open line ends, normally then combined with a
based on information from auxiliary contacts of the circuit
directional reactive over-power function to supervise the
breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from
system voltage. When triggered, the function will cause an
unsymmetrical phase currents when required.
alarm, switch in reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.
Directional over/underpower protection GOPPDOP/
OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse
GUPPDUP
SEMOD175421-4 v7 or definite time delayed.
The directional over-/under-power protection (GOPPDOP/
GUPPDUP) can be used wherever a high/low active, reactive OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to
or apparent power protection or alarming is required. The system service voltage.
functions can alternatively be used to check the direction of
active or reactive power flow in the power system. There are Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV
M13808-3 v11
a number of applications where such functionality is needed. Residual voltages may occur in the power system during
Some of them are: earth faults.
• detection of reversed active power flow Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV)
• detection of high reactive power flow function calculates the residual voltage from the three-phase
voltage input transformers or measures it from a single
Each function has two steps with definite time delay. voltage input transformer fed from an open delta or neutral
point voltage transformer.
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC
SEMOD171446-5 v2
The main purpose of the function Broken conductor check ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or
(BRCPTOC) is the detection of broken conductors on definite time delay.
protected power lines and cables (series faults). Detection
can be used to give alarm only or trip the line breaker. A reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth faults.
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH

GUID-935E1CE8-601F-40E2-8D22-2FF68420FADF v6 M13319-3 v9
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection (VRPVOC) When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator
function can be used as generator backup protection against is subjected to a magnetic flux density beyond its design
short-circuits. limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated components that
are not designed to carry flux. This will cause eddy currents
The overcurrent protection feature has a settable current level to flow. These eddy currents can cause excessive heating
that can be used either with definite time or inverse time and severe damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a
characteristic. Additionally, it can be voltage controlled/
restrained.
38 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
relatively short time. The function has settable inverse 8. Frequency protection
operating curves and independent alarm stages.
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF
M13349-3 v13
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of generation in

SEMOD153862-5 v7
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It the network.
compares the voltages from two three phase sets of voltage
transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one trip Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) measures frequency
step. with high accuracy, and is used for load shedding systems,
remedial action schemes, gas turbine startup and so on.
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV Separate definite time delays are provided for operate and
SEMOD171457-5 v8
Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV ) is suitable for use in restore.
networks with an automatic system restoration function.
LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to the circuit SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking.
breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage
a time longer than the set time and the circuit breaker
measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase-
remains closed.
neutral voltages to be connected.
The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse failure
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF
supervision FUFSPVC. M14953-3 v12
Overfrequency protection function (SAPTOF) is applicable in
Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC all situations, where reliable detection of high fundamental
GUID-82856D0B-5C5E-499A-9A62-CC511E4F047A v3
The radial feeder protection (PAPGAPC) function is used to power system frequency is needed.
provide protection of radial feeders having passive loads or
Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or
weak end in-feed sources. It is possible to achieve fast
shunt faults in the power network. Close to the generating
tripping using communication system with remote end or
plant, generator governor problems can also cause over
delayed tripping not requiring communication or upon
frequency.
communication system failure. For fast tripping, scheme
communication is required. Delayed tripping does not require SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is used
scheme communication. mainly for generation shedding and remedial action schemes.
It is also used as a frequency stage initiating load restoring. A
The PAPGAPC function performs phase selection using
definite time delay is provided for operate.
measured voltages. Each phase voltage is compared to the
opposite phase-phase voltage. A phase is deemed to have a SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
fault if its phase voltage drops below a settable percentage of
the opposite phase-phase voltage. The phase - phase The operation is based on positive sequence voltage
voltages include memory. This memory function has a measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase-
settable time constant. neutral voltages to be connected.
The voltage-based phase selection is used for both fast and Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC
M14965-3 v13
delayed tripping. To achieve fast tripping, scheme The rate-of-change of frequency protection function
communication is required. Delayed tripping does not require (SAPFRC ) gives an early indication of a main disturbance in
scheme communication. It is possible to permit delayed the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with high accuracy,
tripping only upon failure of the communications channel by and can be used for generation shedding, load shedding and
blocking the delayed tripping logic with a communications remedial action schemes. SAPFRC can discriminate between
channel healthy input signal. a positive or negative change of frequency. A definite time
delay is provided for operate.
On receipt of the communications signal, phase selective
outputs for fast tripping are set based on the phase(s) in SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The
which the phase selection function has operated. operation is based on positive sequence voltage
measurement and requires two phase-phase or three phase-
For delayed tripping, single pole and three pole delays are neutral voltages to be connected.
separately and independently settable. Furthermore, it is
possible to enable or disable single pole and three pole
delayed tripping. For single phase faults, it is possible to 9. Multipurpose protection
include a residual current check in the tripping logic. Three General current and voltage protection CVGAPC
pole tripping is always selected for phase selection on more M13083-11 v9
The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC) can be
than one phase. Three pole tripping will also occur if the utilized as a negative sequence current protection detecting
residual current exceeds the set level during fuse failure for a
time longer than the three pole trip delay time.
ABB 39
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs used
unsymmetrical faults. in directly or low impedance earthed networks. It is based on
the zero sequence measuring quantities.
CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for
high resistive earth faults, outside the distance protection The selection of different operation modes is possible by a
reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are used, setting parameter in order to take into account the particular
which measures the neutral current and each of the three earthing of the network.
phase voltages. This will give an independence from load
currents and this phase selection will be used in conjunction A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage
with the detection of the earth fault from the directional earth measurements can be added to the fuse failure supervision
fault protection function. function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which in
practice is more associated with voltage transformer
switching during station operations.
10. General calculation
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC GUID-6AF2219A-264F-4971-8D03-3B8A9D0CB284 v5
Different protection functions within the protection IED
GUID-EB0B11C3-FF79-4B8D-A335-649623E832F9 v3
The multi-purpose filter function block (SMAIHPAC) is operates on the basis of measured voltage at the relay point.
arranged as a three-phase filter. It has very much the same Some example of protection functions are:
user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the standard pre-
processing function block SMAI. However the main difference • Distance protection function.
is that it can be used to extract any frequency component • Undervoltage function.
from the input signal. Thus it can, for example, be used to • Energisation function and voltage check for the weak
build sub-synchronous resonance protection for synchronous infeed logic.
generator.
These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault occurs
in the secondary circuits between voltage instrument
11. Secondary system supervision transformers and the IED. These unintentional operations can
be prevented by fuse failure supervision (VDSPVC).
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC
M12444-3 v10
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in voltage
unwanted operation of many protection functions such as measurement circuit, based on phase wise comparison of
differential, earth-fault current and negative-sequence current voltages of main and pilot fused circuits. VDSPVC blocking
functions. output can be configured to block functions that need to be
blocked in case of faults in the voltage circuit.
Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the residual
current from a three phase set of current transformer cores
with the neutral point current on a separate input taken from 12. Control
another set of cores on the current transformer.
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit and SESRSYN
M12480-3 v16
is used as alarm or to block protection functions expected to The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous
give inadvertent tripping. networks at the correct moment including the breaker closing
time, which improves the network stability.
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC
SEMOD113820-4 v12
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FUFSPVC) is Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
to block voltage measuring functions at failures in the (SESRSYN) function checks that the voltages on both sides of
secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and the the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with at least one
IED in order to avoid inadvertent operations that otherwise side dead to ensure that closing can be done safely.
might occur.
SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three scheme for double bus and 1½ breaker or ring busbar
different detection methods, negative sequence and zero arrangements.
sequence based detection and an additional delta voltage
and delta current detection. Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be
checked by the function and can have different settings.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended
for IEDs used in isolated or high-impedance earthed For systems, which can run asynchronously, a synchronizing
networks. It is based on the negative-sequence quantities. feature is also provided. The main purpose of the
synchronizing feature is to provide controlled closing of circuit
breakers when two asynchronous systems are in phase and
40 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
can be connected. The synchronizing feature evaluates Normal security means that only the command is evaluated
voltage difference, phase angle difference, slip frequency and and the resulting position is not supervised. Enhanced
frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled closing security means that the command is evaluated with an
of the circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a setting. additional supervision of the status value of the control
object. The command sequence with enhanced security is
Autorecloser SMBRREC always terminated by a CommandTermination service
M12390-3 v17
The auto recloser (SMBRREC) function provides: primitive and an AddCause telling if the command was
• high-speed and/or delayed auto reclosing successful or if something went wrong.
• single and/or three phase auto reclosing
• support for single or multi-breaker applications. Control operation can be performed from the local HMI with
authority control if so defined.
The auto recloser can be used for delayed busbar restoration. Interlocking
M13531-3 v4
The interlocking function blocks the possibility to operate
Up to five reclosing shots can be performed. The first shot
primary switching devices, for instance when a disconnector
can be single-, two-, and /or three-phase depending on the
is under load, in order to prevent material damage and/or
type of the fault and the selected auto reclosing mode.
accidental human injury.
Several auto reclosing functions can be provided for multi-
Each apparatus control function has interlocking modules
breaker arrangements. A priority circuit allows one circuit
included for different switchyard arrangements, where each
breaker to reclose first and the second will only close if the
function handles interlocking of one bay. The interlocking
fault proved to be transient.
function is distributed to each IED and is not dependent on
Each auto reclosing function can be configured to co-operate any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the
with the synchrocheck function. IEDs communicate via the system-wide interbay bus (IEC
61850-8-1) or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs. The
Apparatus control APC interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration
M13444-3 v15
The apparatus control functions are used for control and and apparatus position status at any given time.
supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and earthing
switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after For easy and safe implementation of the interlocking function,
evaluation of conditions from other functions such as the IED is delivered with standardized and tested software
interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selection and interlocking modules containing logic for the interlocking
external or internal blockings. conditions. The interlocking conditions can be altered, to
meet the customer’s specific requirements, by adding
configurable logic by means of the graphical configuration
The complete apparatus control function is
tool.
not included in this product, and the
information below is included for Switch controller SCSWI
understanding of the principle for the use of M13486-3 v10
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all
QCBAY, LOCREM, and LOCREMCTRL. functions to properly select and operate switching primary
apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle and operate
Apparatus control features: on one multi-phase device or up to three one-phase devices.
• Select-Execute principle to give high reliability
• Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation Circuit breaker SXCBR
M13489-3 v6
• Selection and supervision of operator place The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the
• Command supervision actual status of positions and to perform the control
• Block/deblock of operation operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
• Block/deblock of updating of position indications apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary output
• Substitution of position and quality indications boards and to supervise the switching operation and position.
• Overriding of interlocking functions
Circuit switch SXSWI
• Overriding of synchrocheck M16492-3 v6
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to provide
• Operation counter
the actual status of positions and to perform the control
• Suppression of mid position
operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary
apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or earthing switches
Two types of command models can be used: via binary output boards and to supervise the switching
• Direct with normal security operation and position.
• SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security
ABB 41
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Reservation function QCRSV Selector mini switch VSGAPC

M13506-3 v5 SEMOD158756-5 v10
The purpose of the reservation (QCRSV) function is primarily The Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function block is a
to transfer interlocking information between IEDs in a safe multipurpose function used for a variety of applications, as a
way and to prevent double operation in a bay, switchyard general purpose switch.
part, or complete substation.
VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu, from a symbol on
Reservation input RESIN the single line diagram (SLD) on the local HMI or from Binary
M16501-3 v5
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the inputs.
reservation information from other bays. The number of
instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to Generic communication function for Double Point indication
60 instances are available). DPGAPC
SEMOD55850-5 v7
Generic communication function for Double Point indication
Bay control QCBAY (DPGAPC) function block is used to send double point
M13447-3 v8
The Bay control (QCBAY) function is used together with Local position indications to other systems, equipment or functions
remote and local remote control functions to handle the in the substation through IEC 61850-8-1 or other
selection of the operator place per bay. QCBAY also provides communication protocols. It is especially intended to be used
blocking functions that can be distributed to different in the interlocking station-wide logics.
apparatuses within the bay.
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC
SEMOD176462-4 v11
Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC)
XLNPROXY function block is a collection of 8 single point commands that
GUID-11F9CA1C-8E20-489B-822B-34DACC59553A v1
The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE can be used for direct commands for example reset of LEDs
(XLNPROXY) gives an internal representation of the position or putting IED in "ChangeLock" state from remote. In this
status and control response for a switch modelled in a way, simple commands can be sent directly to the IED
breaker IED. This representation is identical to that of an outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the
SXCBR or SXSWI function. result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other
means, such as binary inputs and SPGAPC function blocks.
GOOSE function block to receive a switching device The commands can be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse
GOOSEXLNRCV time.
GUID-5AC7DE11-CB95-4565-A8AE-FB23D59FD717 v1
The GOOSE XLN Receive component is used to collect
information from another device’s XCBR/XSWI logical node Automation bits, command function for DNP3.0 AUTOBITS
SEMOD158591-5 v8
sent over process bus via GOOSE. The GOOSE XLN Receive Automation bits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used within
component includes 12 different outputs (and their respective PCM600 to get into the configuration of the commands
channel valid bits) with defined names to ease the 61850 coming through the DNP3 protocol. The AUTOBITS function
mapping of the GOOSE signals in the configuration process. plays the same role as functions GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC
61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for LON).
Local remote LOCREM/Local remote control LOCREMCTRL
M17086-3 v10
The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/ Single command, 16 signals
M12446-6 v5
remote switch are connected via the function blocks local The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation
remote (LOCREM) and local remote control (LOCREMCTRL) automation system or from the local HMI. The command
to the Bay control (QCBAY) function block. The parameter function block has outputs that can be used, for example, to
ControlMode in function block LOCREM is set to choose if control high voltage apparatuses or for other user defined
the switch signals are coming from the local HMI or from an functionality.
external hardware switch connected via binary inputs.
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI 13. Scheme communication
presentation SLGAPC
SEMOD114908-4 v11 Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking
The logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
scheme signal transmit ZCPSCH
presentation (SLGAPC) (or the selector switch function block) M13860-3 v11
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults,
is used to get an enhanced selector switch functionality
scheme communication logic is provided. All types of
compared to the one provided by a hardware selector switch.
communication schemes for permissive underreaching,
Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities,
permissive overreaching, blocking, delta based blocking,
in order to have different functions operating on pre-set
unblocking and intertrip are available.
values. Hardware switches are however sources for
maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an extended The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used for
purchase portfolio. The selector switch function eliminates all scheme communication signaling when included.
these problems.
42 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase
protection ZC1PPSCH segregated communication ZC1WPSCH
SEMOD141686-4 v3 SEMOD156473-5 v3
Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase
clearance for all faults on a power line. All possible types of segregated communication (ZC1WPSCH) function is used to
communication schemes for example, permissive underreach, prevent unwanted operations due to current reversal when
permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available. To using permissive overreach protection schemes in application
manage problems with simultaneous faults on parallel power with parallel lines where the overreach from the two ends
lines phase segregated communication is needed. This will overlaps on the parallel line.
then replace the standard Scheme communication logic for
distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH) on important The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the
lines where three communication channels (in each apparent power behind the protection can be too low to
subsystem) are available for the distance protection activate the distance protection function. When activated,
communication. received carrier signal together with local undervoltage criteria
and no reverse zone operation gives an instantaneous trip.
The main purpose of the Phase segregated scheme The received signal is also echoed back to accelerate the
communication logic for distance protection (ZC1PPSCH) sending end.
function is to supplement the distance protection function
such that: Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH
M13823-3 v7
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no
• fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end communication channel is available, local acceleration logic
for which the faults are on the part of the line not (ZCLCPSCH) can be used. This logic enables fast fault
covered by its underreaching zone. clearing and re-closing during certain conditions, but
• correct phase selection can be maintained to support naturally, it can not fully replace a communication channel.
single-pole tripping for faults occurring anywhere on the
entire length of a double circuit line. The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser (zone
extension) or by the loss-of-load current (loss-of-load
To accomplish this, three separate communication channels, acceleration).
that is, one per phase, each capable of transmitting a signal
in each direction is required. Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent
protection ECPSCH
M13918-4 v11
ZC1PPSCH can be completed with the current reversal and To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of
WEI logic for phase segregated communication, when found the line not covered by the instantaneous step of the residual
necessary in Blocking and Permissive overreaching schemes. overcurrent protection, the directional residual overcurrent
protection can be supported with a logic that uses
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance communication channels.
protection ZCRWPSCH
M13896-3 v15
The ZCRWPSCH function provides the current reversal and In the directional scheme, information of the fault current
weak end infeed logic functions that supplement the standard direction must be transmitted to the other line end. With
scheme communication logic. It is not suitable for standalone directional comparison, a short operate time of the protection
use as it requires inputs from the distance protection including a channel transmission time, can be achieved. This
functions and the scheme communications function included short operate time enables rapid autoreclosing function after
within the terminal. the fault clearance.
On detection of a current reversal, the current reversal logic The communication logic module for directional residual
provides an output to block the sending of the teleprotection current protection enables blocking as well as permissive
signal to the remote end, and to block the permissive tripping under/overreaching, and unblocking schemes. The logic can
at the local end. This blocking condition is maintained long also be supported by additional logic for weak-end infeed and
enough to ensure that no unwanted operation will occur as a current reversal, included in Current reversal and weak-end
result of the current reversal. infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH)
function.
On verification of a weak end infeed condition, the weak end
infeed logic provides an output for sending the received Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
teleprotection signal back to the remote sending end and overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH
M13928-3 v8
other output(s) for local tripping. For terminals equipped for The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
single- and two-pole tripping, outputs for the faulted phase(s) overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH) is a supplement to
are provided. Undervoltage detectors are used to detect the Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent
faulted phase(s). protection ECPSCH.
ABB 43
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the direct transfer trip logic to ensure tripping of the line only
directional earth fault protection function can be supported under abnormal conditions.
with logic that uses tele-protection channels.
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC
GUID-413851A9-5EB7-4C48-8F5D-E30E470EFFAF v2
This is why the IEDs have available additions to the scheme Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC) function is a
communication logic. fast way of finding any abnormality in line currents. When
M13928-6 v2 there is a fault in the system, the current changes faster than
If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at both the voltage. SCCVPTOC finds abnormal condition based on
terminals, overreaching permissive communication schemes phase-to-phase current variation. The main application is as a
can trip unselectively due to fault current reversal. This local criterion to increase security when transfer trips are
unwanted tripping affects the healthy line when a fault is used.
cleared on the other line. This lack of security can result in a
total loss of interconnection between the two buses. To avoid Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC
GUID-79AB9B9E-9200-44D7-B4EE-57C9E7BB74A9 v2
this type of disturbance, a fault current reversal logic In Direct transfer trip (DTT) scheme, the received CR signal
(transient blocking logic) can be used. gives the trip to the circuit breaker after checking certain local
M13928-8 v5 criteria functions in order to increase the security of the
Permissive communication schemes for residual overcurrent overall tripping functionality. Carrier receive logic
protection can basically operate only when the protection in (LCCRPTRC) function gives final trip output of the DTT
the remote IED can detect the fault. The detection requires a scheme.
sufficient minimum residual fault current, out from this IED.
The fault current can be too low due to an opened breaker or Features:
high-positive and/or zero-sequence source impedance
behind this IED. To overcome these conditions, weak-end • Carrier redundancy to ensure security in DTT scheme
infeed (WEI) echo logic is used. The weak-end infeed echo is • Blocking function output on CR Channel Error
limited to 200 ms to avoid channel lockup. • Phase wise trip outputs
Direct transfer trip DTT Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV

GUID-C5CBB6A2-780D-4008-98E3-455A404D32CB v2
Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC Negative sequence components are present in all types of
GUID-25A2A94F-09FE-4552-89F8-CF22632A7A0D v2
fault condition. Negative sequence voltage and current get
Low active power and power factor protection (LAPPGAPC) high values during unsymmetrical faults.
function measures power flow. It can be used for protection
and monitoring of: Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV
GUID-4CF3EC6A-D286-4808-929B-C9302418E4ED v2
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal
• phase wise low active power conditions involving earth. They can reach considerably high
• phase wise low power factor values during earth faults.
• phase wise reactive power and apparent power as
service values Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC
GUID-C4F99554-88BC-4F11-9EFE-91BCA6ED1261 v2
Negative sequence components are present in all types of
Following features are available: fault condition. They can reach considerably high values
during abnormal operation.
• Definite time stage for low active power protection
• Definite time stage for low power factor protection Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC
GUID-F0C38DA1-2F39-46DE-AFFE-F919E6CF4A57 v2
• Individual enabling of Low active power and Low power Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal
factor functions conditions involving earth. They have a considerably high
• Low active power trip with 2 selection modes '1 out of 3' value during earth faults.
and '2 out of 3'
• Phase wise calculated values of apparent power, Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC
GUID-AC4FF35E-5D86-421E-82C7-93F600E9F453 v2
reactive power, active power and power factor are Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC) is designed for
available as service values overcurrent conditions.
• Insensitive to small variations in voltage and current
Features:
Compensated over and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC
GUID-229EB419-0903-46FA-9192-BBB35725C841 v2 • Phase wise start and trip signals
Compensated over and undervoltage protection
• Overcurrent protection
(COUVGAPC) function calculates the remote end voltage of
• Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
the transmission line utilizing local measured voltage, current
• Single definite time stage trip function.
and with the help of transmission line parameters, that is, line
resistance, reactance, capacitance and local shunt reactor.
For protection of long transmission line for in zone faults,
COUVGAPCcan be incorporated with local criteria within
44 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC GUID-D8D1A4EE-A87F-46C6-8529-277FC1ADA9B0 v4

GUID-E8EA5CE8-ED7A-4FA3-9DAC-83227D53387F v3
Three phase undercurrent function (LCP3PTUC) is designed The group indication logic function (INDCALH) is used to
for detecting loss of load conditions. route several indication signals to a common indication, LED
and/or contact, in the IED.
Features:
Basic configurable logic blocks
M11396-4 v17
• Phase wise start and trip signals The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate the time
• Phase wise RMS current is available as service values stamp and quality of signals (have no suffix QT at the end of
• Single definite time stage trip function their function name). A number of logic blocks and timers are
always available as basic for the user to adapt the
configuration to the specific application needs. The list below
14. Logic shows a summary of the function blocks and their features.
Tripping logic SMPPTRC These logic blocks are also available as part of an extension
logic package with the same number of instances.
M12275-3 v14
A function block for protection tripping and general start
indication is always provided as a basic function for each
• AND function block. The AND function is used to form
circuit breaker. It provides a settable pulse prolongation time
general combinatory expressions with boolean variables.
to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient length, as well as all
The AND function block has up to four inputs and two
functionality necessary for correct co-operation with
outputs. One of the outputs is inverted.
autoreclosing functions.
• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signal
The trip function block includes a settable latch function for
should be able to pass from the input to the output.
the trip signal and circuit breaker lockout.
• INVERTER function block that inverts the input signal to the
The trip function can collect start and directional signals from
output.
different application functions. The aggregated start and
directional signals are mapped to the IEC 61850 logical node • LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the output
data model. signal one execution cycle.
General start matrix block SMAGAPC • OR function block. The OR function is used to form general
GUID-BA516165-96DE-4CD9-979B-29457C7653C0 v3
The Start Matrix (SMAGAPC) merges start and directional combinatory expressions with boolean variables. The OR
output signals from different application functions and creates function block has up to six inputs and two outputs. One of
a common start and directional output signal ( STDIR ) to be the outputs is inverted.
connected to the Trip function.
• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example, for
The purpose of this functionality is to provide general start pulse extensions or limiting of operation of outputs, settable
and directional information for the IEC 61850 trip logic data pulse time.
model SMPPTRC.
• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset or
Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC set an output from two inputs respectively. Each block has
M15321-3 v13
The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) function is used to route trip two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting
signals and other logical output signals to different output controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or
contacts on the IED. returns to the state it had before the power interruption.
RESET input has priority.
The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and these
outputs can be connected to physical tripping outputs • SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or
according to the specific application needs for settable pulse reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each block
or steady output. has two outputs where one is inverted. The memory setting
controls if, after a power interruption, the flip-flop resets or
Group alarm logic function ALMCALH
GUID-16E60E27-F7A8-416D-8648-8174AAC49BB5 v4 returns to the state it had before the power interruption.
The group alarm logic function (ALMCALH) is used to route
The SET input has priority.
several alarm signals to a common indication, LED and/or
contact, in the IED. • TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed
outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a settable
Group warning logic function WRNCALH
GUID-F7D9A012-3AD4-4D86-BE97-DF2A99BE5383 v4 time delay.
The group warning logic function (WRNCALH) is used to route
several warning signals to a common indication, LED and/or • XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with
contact, in the IED. boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two outputs.
Group indication logic function INDCALH

ABB 45
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
One of the outputs is inverted. The output signal OUT is 1 if • SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set
the input signals are different and 0 if they are the same. or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each
block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
memory setting controls if the block after a power
Configurable logic blocks Q/T
GUID-0CA6511A-E8BD-416E-9B59-5C6BD98C60B7 v5 interruption should return to the state before the
The configurable logic blocks QT propagate the time stamp
interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates
and the quality of the input signals (have suffix QT at the end
the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
of their function name).
• TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out delayed
The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs'
outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a
configuration to the specific application needs. The list below
settable time delay. The function also propagates the
shows a summary of the function blocks and their features.
time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
• ANDQT AND function block. The function also
• XORQT XOR function block. The function also
propagates the time stamp and the quality of input
propagates the time stamp and the quality of the input
signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs
signals. Each block has two outputs where one is
where one is inverted.
inverted.
• INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group
signal. Single position input is copied to value part of Extension logic package
SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied to time part of
GUID-144BAAA3-A5EF-49AF-8876-93CC5F3D0234 v1
The logic extension block package includes additional trip
SP_OUT output. Quality input bits are copied to the matrix logic and configurable logic blocks.
corresponding quality part of SP_OUT output.
Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN
• INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group
M15322-3 v15
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) has nine pre-set (fixed)
signal input. The value part of single position input is signals that can be used in the configuration of an IED, either
copied to SI_OUT output. The time part of single for forcing the unused inputs in other function blocks to a
position input is copied to TIME output. The quality bits certain level/value, or for creating certain logic. Boolean,
in the common part and the indication part of inputs integer, floating point, string types of signals are available.
signal are copied to the corresponding quality output.
One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs.
• INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of outputs
according to a "valid" input. Inputs are copied to Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow
outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality invalid bit is supervision TEIGAPC
GUID-2D64874A-F266-4251-8EED-E813F40513D7 v3
set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to invalid. The Elapsed time integrator function (TEIGAPC) is a function
The time stamp of an output will be set to the latest time that accumulates the elapsed time when a given binary signal
stamp of INPUT and VALID inputs. has been high.
• INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input signal The main features of TEIGAPC
and propagates the time stamp and the quality of the
input signal. • Applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9
seconds).
• ORQT OR function block that also propagates the time • Supervision of limit transgression conditions and
stamp and the quality of the input signals. Each block overflow.
has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted. • Possibility to define a warning or alarm with the
resolution of 10 milliseconds.
• PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be used, • Retaining of the integration value.
for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of operation • Possibilities for blocking and reset.
of outputs. The function also propagates the time stamp • Reporting of the integrated time.
and the quality of the input signal.
• RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can reset Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit B16I
SEMOD175725-4 v5
or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit (B16I) is used to
block has two outputs where one is inverted. The transform a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals into an integer.
memory setting controls if the block after a power
Boolean to integer conversion with logical node
interruption should return to the state before the
representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC
interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates SEMOD175781-4 v8
the time stamp and the quality of the input signal. Boolean to integer conversion with logical node
representation, 16 bit (BTIGAPC) is used to transform a set of
46 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
16 boolean (logical) signals into an integer. The block input M12153-3 v14
will freeze the output at the last value. Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the
primary and/or in the secondary system together with
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16 continuous event-logging is accomplished by the disturbance
SEMOD158373-5 v6
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used to report functionality.
transform an integer into a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals.
Disturbance report (DRPRDRE), always included in the IED,
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node acquires sampled data of all selected analog input and binary
representation ITBGAPC signals connected to the function block with a maximum of
SEMOD158421-5 v9
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node representation 40 analog and 352 binary signals.
function (ITBGAPC) is used to transform an integer which is
transmitted over IEC 61850 and received by the function to The Disturbance report functionality is a common name for
16 boolean (logic) output signals. several functions:
Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP • Event list

GUID-A93564FA-0017-4939-A9C1-095DA0FD9832 v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of • Indications
integer values in the system relative to each other or to a • Event recorder
fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used • Trip value recorder
for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics. • Disturbance recorder
• Fault locator
Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP • Settings information
GUID-E17A88D7-D095-4F36-9CD5-64EBFD2A1DEA v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of real
value signals in the system relative to each other or to a fixed The Disturbance report function is characterized by great
value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be used for flexibility regarding configuration, starting conditions,
monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other logics. recording times, and large storage capacity.
A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to the

15. Monitoring AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks, which are set to trigger
the disturbance recorder. All connected signals from start of
Measurements CVMMXN, CMMXU, VNMMXU, VMMXU, pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time will be included in
CMSQI, VMSQI the recording. Disturbance record will have visible settings
M12024-3 v9
The measurement functions are used to get on-line from all function instances that are configured in the
information from the IED. These service values make it application configuration tool.
possible to display on-line information on the local HMI and
on the substation automation system about: Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the
standard Comtrade format as a reader file HDR, a
• measured voltages, currents, frequency, active, reactive configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same applies
and apparent power and power factor to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer.
• measured analog values from merging units The local HMI is used to get information about the recordings.
• primary phasors The disturbance report files can be uploaded to PCM600 for
• positive, negative and zero sequence currents and further analysis using the disturbance handling tool.
voltages
• mA, input currents Event list DRPRDRE
M12412-6 v8
• pulse counters Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the system

from an overview perspective and is a complement to specific
disturbance recorder functions.
Supervision of mA input signals
M16054-3 v2
The main purpose of the function is to measure and process The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the
signals from different measuring transducers. Many devices Disturbance recorder function. The list may contain up to
used in process control represent various parameters such as 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.
frequency, temperature and DC battery voltage as low current
values, usually in the range 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA. Indications DRPRDRE
M12030-3 v7
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about
Alarm limits can be set and used as triggers, e.g. to generate disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary system it
trip or alarm signals. is important to know, for example binary signals that have
changed status during a disturbance. This information is used
The function requires that the IED is equipped with the mA
in the short perspective to get information via the local HMI in
input module.
a straightforward way.
Disturbance report DRPRDRE
ABB 47
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and to ten seconds of data before the trigger instant can be saved
red), which will display status information about the IED and in the disturbance file.
the Disturbance recorder function (triggered).
The disturbance recorder information for up to 100
The Indication list function shows all selected binary input disturbances are saved in the IED and the local HMI is used
signals connected to the Disturbance recorder function that to view the list of recordings .
have changed status during a disturbance.
Event function
M12805-6 v11
Event recorder DRPRDRE When using a Substation Automation system with LON or
M12033-3 v8
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances SPA communication, time-tagged events can be sent at
in the primary and/or in the secondary system is vital, for change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. These
example, time-tagged events logged during disturbances. events are created from any available signal in the IED that is
This information is used for different purposes in the short connected to the Event function (EVENT). The EVENT
term (for example corrective actions) and in the long term (for function block is used for LON and SPA communication.
example functional analysis).
Analog, integer and double indication values are also
The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals transferred through the EVENT function.
connected to the Disturbance recorder function. Each
recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events. Generic communication function for Single Point indication
SPGAPC
SEMOD55713-5 v8
The event recorder information is available for the Generic communication function for Single Point indication
disturbances locally in the IED. (SPGAPC) is used to send one single logical signal to other
systems or equipment in the substation.
The event recording information is an integrated part of the
disturbance record (Comtrade file). Generic communication function for measured values
MVGAPC
Trip value recorder DRPRDRE Generic communication function for measured values
SEMOD55872-5 v10
M12128-3 v7
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents (MVGAPC) function is used to send the instantaneous value
and voltages are vital for the disturbance evaluation. of an analog signal to other systems or equipment in the
substation. It can also be used inside the same IED, to attach
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected
a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to permit
analog input signals connected to the Disturbance recorder
measurement supervision on that value.
function. The result is magnitude and phase angle before and
during the fault for each analog input signal. Measured value expander block RANGE_XP
SEMOD52450-4 v8
The current and voltage measurements functions (CVMMXN,
The trip value recorder information is available for the
CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU), current and voltage
disturbances locally in the IED.
sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and VMSQI) and
The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the IEC 61850 generic communication I/O functions (MVGAPC)
disturbance record (Comtrade file). are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All
measured values can be supervised with four settable limits:
Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE low-low limit, low limit, high limit and high-high limit. The
M12156-3 v12
The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast, complete measure value expander block (RANGE_XP) has been
and reliable information about disturbances in the power introduced to enable translating the integer output signal from
system. It facilitates understanding system behavior and the measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low
related primary and secondary equipment during and after a limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or above high-
disturbance. Recorded information is used for different high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the
purposes in the short perspective (for example corrective configurable logic or for alarming purpose.
actions) and long perspective (for example functional
analysis). Insulation supervision for gas medium function SSIMG
GUID-0692CD0D-F33E-4370-AC91-B216CAAAFC28 v6
Insulation supervision for gas medium (SSIMG) is used for
The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from monitoring the circuit breaker condition. Binary information
selected analog and binary signals connected to the based on the gas pressure in the circuit breaker is used as
Disturbance recorder function (maximum 40 analog and 352 input signals to the function. In addition, the function
binary signals). The binary signals available are the same as generates alarms based on received information.
for the event recorder function.
Insulation supervision for liquid medium SSIML
GUID-3B1A665F-60A5-4343-85F4-AD9C066CBE8D v7
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not Insulation supervision for liquid medium (SSIML) is used for
dependent on the operation of protection functions. It can monitoring the oil insulated device condition. For example,
record disturbances not detected by protection functions. Up transformers, shunt reactors, and so on. Binary information
48 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
based on the oil level in the oil insulated devices are used as • Applicable to very long time accumulation (≤ 99999.9
input signals to the function. In addition, the function hours)
generates alarms based on the received information. • Supervision of limit transgression conditions and rollover/
overflow
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR • Possibility to define a warning and alarm with the
GUID-E1FD74C3-B9B6-4E11-AA1B-7E7F822FB4DD v13
The circuit breaker condition monitoring function (SSCBR) is resolution of 0.1 hours
used to monitor different parameters of the breaker condition. • Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart
The breaker requires maintenance when the number of • Possibilities for blocking and reset
operations reaches a predefined value. For a proper • Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time
functioning of the circuit breaker, it is essential to monitor the • Reporting of the accumulated time
circuit breaker operation, spring charge indication or breaker
wear, travel time, number of operation cycles and estimate
the accumulated energy during arcing periods.
16. Metering
Fault locator LMBRFLO Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT

M13394-3 v7
M13970-3 v13
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally
minimize the outages after a persistent fault and/or to pin- generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming from an
point a weak spot on the line. external energy meter, for calculation of energy consumption
values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module
The fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving and then read by the PCFCNT function. A scaled service
the distance to the fault in km, miles or % of line length. The value is available over the station bus. The special Binary
main advantage is the high accuracy achieved by input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must
compensating for load current and for the mutual zero- be ordered to achieve this functionality.
sequence effect on double circuit lines.
Function for energy calculation and demand handling
The compensation includes setting of the remote and local ETPMMTR
GUID-6898E29B-DA70-421C-837C-1BBED8C63A7A v3
sources and calculation of the distribution of fault currents Power system measurement (CVMMXN) can be used to
from each side. This distribution of fault current, together with measure active as well as reactive power values. Function for
recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate energy calculation and demand handling (ETPMMTR) uses
the fault position. The fault can be recalculated with new measured active and reactive power as input and calculates
source data at the actual fault to further increase the the accumulated active and reactive energy pulses, in forward
accuracy. and reverse direction. Energy values can be read or
generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are
Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source also calculated by the function. This function includes zero
voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart, the point clamping to remove noise from the input signal. As
accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced output of this function: periodic energy calculations,
compensation included in fault locator. integration of energy values, calculation of energy pulses,
alarm signals for limit violation of energy values and maximum
Event counter with limit supervison L4UFCNT
GUID-13157EAB-1686-4D2E-85DF-EC89768F3572 v6
power demand, can be found.
The Limit counter (L4UFCNT) provides a settable counter with
four independent limits where the number of positive and/or The values of active and reactive energies are calculated from
negative flanks on the input signal are counted against the the input power values by integrating them over a selected
setting values for limits. The output for each limit is activated time tEnergy . The integration of active and reactive energy
when the counted value reaches that limit. values will happen in both forward and reverse directions.
These energy values are available as output signals and also
Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.
as pulse outputs. Integration of energy values can be
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC controlled by inputs (STARTACC and STOPACC) and EnaAcc
GUID-464FB24F-B367-446C-963A-A14841943B87 v2
The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is a function setting and it can be reset to initial values with RSTACC
that accumulates the elapsed time when a given binary signal input.
has been high.
The maximum demand for active and reactive powers are
The main features of TEILGAPC are: calculated for the set time interval tEnergy and these values
are updated every minute through output channels. The
active and reactive maximum power demand values are
calculated for both forward and reverse direction and these
values can be reset with RSTDMD input.
ABB 49
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M11345-3 v11
17. Human machine interface
Precision time protocol PTP
Local HMI PTP according to IEEE 1588-2008 and specifically its profile
AMU0600442 v15
IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3 for power utility automation is a
synchronization method that can be used to maintain a
common time within a station. This time can be synchronized
to the global time using, for instance, a GPS receiver. If PTP
is enabled on the IEDs and the switches that connect the
station are compatible with IEEE 1588, the station will
become synchronized to one common time with an accuracy
of under 1us. Using an IED as a boundary clock between
several networks will keep 1us accuracy on three levels or
when using an HSR, 15 IEDs can be connected in a ring
without losing a single microsecond in accuracy.
19. Ethernet
Access points
GUID-6E5D2696-A8EE-43E7-A94B-69C3D0612127 v2
An access point is an Ethernet communication interface for
single or redundant station communication. Each access
point is allocated with one physical Ethernet port, two
physical Ethernet ports are allocated if redundant
communication is activated for the access point.
Device 1 Device 1
AP1 AP2 AP3 AP1 AP2 AP3

SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303 SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303
Figure 16. Local human-machine interface IEC16000092 V1 EN-US
Figure 17. Access points, non redundant (left) and redundant

communication (right)
The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements
• Graphical display capable of showing a user defined single
line diagram and provide an interface for controlling Access points diagnostics
switchgear. GUID-20F64A6D-AA8C-47D7-AA7D-4810996B2FF2 v2
The access point diagnostics function blocks (RCHLCCH,
• Navigation buttons and five user defined command buttons SCHLCCH and FRONTSTATUS) supervise communication.
to shortcuts in the HMI tree or simple commands. SCHLCCH is used for communication over the rear Ethernet
• 15 user defined three-color LEDs. ports, RCHLCCH is used for redundant communications over
• Communication port for PCM600. the rear Ethernet ports and FRONTSTATUS is used for
communication over the front port. All access point function
The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling. blocks include output signal for denial of service.
Redundant communication
GUID-A90FDBA7-D4D7-4CBD-9F05-13DCC9971779 v7
18. Basic IED functions
IEC 62439-3 redundant communication PRP
Time synchronization Redundant communication according to IEC 62439-3 PRP-0,
M11344-3 v11
The time synchronization function is used to select a common IEC 62439-3 PRP-1 parallel redundancy protocol (PRP) is
source of absolute time for the synchronization of the IED available as an option when ordering IEDs. PRP according to
when it is a part of a protection system. This makes it IEC 62439-3 uses two optical Ethernet ports.
possible to compare events and disturbance data between all
IEDs within a station automation system and in between sub- IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy HSR
stations. A common source shall be used for IED and merging Redundant station bus communication according to IEC
unit when IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE process bus 62439-3 Edition 2 High-availability seamless redundancy
communication is used. (HSR) is available as an option when ordering IEDs.
Redundant station bus communication according to IEC
62439-3 uses two optical Ethernet ports.
50 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
The HSR ring supports the connection of up to 30 relays. If The front port is only intended for PCM600
more than 30 relays are to be connected, it is recommended communication, maintenance, training and
to split the network into several rings to guarantee the test purposes due to risk of interference
performance for real-time applications. during normal operation.
Routes
GUID-95F9C7BA-92F8-489F-AD0A-047410B5E66F v1
A route is a specified path for data to travel between the IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP
source device in a subnetwork to the destination device in a GUID-9C5DC78E-041B-422B-9668-320E62B847A2 v1
The quality expander component is used to display the
different subnetwork. A route consists of a destination detailed quality of an IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE analog channel.
address and the address of the gateway to be used when The component expands the channel quality output of a
sending data to the destination device, see Figure 18. Merging Unit analog channel received in the IED as per the
IEC 61850-7-3 standard. This component can be used during
the ACT monitoring to get the particular channel quality of the
Merging Unit.
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol

GUID-C3AA21B4-730F-4327-943A-3C77102A80A0 v4
Default gateway Optical Ethernet port communication standard IEC/UCA
61850-9-2LE for process bus is supported. IEC/UCA
61850-9-2LE allows Non Conventional Instrument
Gateway Transformers (NCIT) with Merging Units (MUs) or stand-alone
MUs to exchange information with the IED, and simplifies SA
Source Destination engineering. IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE uses the same port as
IEC 61850-8-1.
Figure 18. Route from source to destination through gateway
LON communication protocol
SEMOD120140-5 v3
Existing stations with ABB station bus LON can be extended
with use of the optical LON interface (glass or plastic). This
20. Station communication allows full SA functionality including peer-to-peer messaging
and cooperation between the IEDs.
Communication protocols
M14815-3 v14
Each IED is provided with several communication interfaces SPA communication protocol
SEMOD120134-5 v1
enabling it to connect to one or many substation level A single glass or plastic port is provided for the ABB SPA
systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation protocol. This allows extensions of simple substation
(SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus. automation systems but the main use is for Substation
Monitoring Systems SMS.
Available communication protocols are:
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
SEMOD120137-5 v4
• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol A single glass or plastic port is provided for the IEC
• IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol 60870-5-103 standard. This allows design of simple
• LON communication protocol substation automation systems including equipment from
• SPA communication protocol different vendors. Disturbance files uploading is provided.
• IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS
Several protocols can be combined in the same IED. 103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid measuring
types depending on the connected signals. The set of
IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
M14787-3 v16 connected inputs will control which ASDUs (Application
IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in
Service Data Units) are generated.
PCM600. The IED is equipped with up to six (order
dependent) optical Ethernet rear ports for IEC 61850-8-1 Measurands user-defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
station bus communication.The IEC 61850-8-1 I103MEASUSR
communication is also possible from the electrical Ethernet I103MEASUSR is a function block with user-defined input
front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows intelligent electrical measurands in monitor direction. These function blocks
devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the
and simplifies system engineering. IED-to-IED communication private range, and the Information number parameter for each
using GOOSE and client-server communication over MMS are block.
supported. Disturbance recording file (COMTRADE) uploading
can be done over MMS or FTP.
ABB 51
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
range, and the Information number parameter for each output

Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR signal.
I103AR is a function block with defined functions for
autorecloser indications in monitor direction. This block Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103
includes the FunctionType parameter, and the information I103GENCMD
number parameter is defined for each output signal. I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic commands
over IEC 60870-5-103. The function has two output signals,
Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF CMD_OFF and CMD_ON, that can be used to implement
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for earth double-point command schemes.
fault indications in monitor direction. This block includes the
FunctionType parameter; the information number parameter The I103GENCMD component can be configured as either 2
is defined for each output signal. pulsed ON/OFF or 2 steady ON/OFF outputs. The ON output
is pulsed with a command with value 2, while the OFF output
Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103 is pulsed with a command with value 1. If in steady mode is
I103FLTPROT ON asserted and OFF deasserted with command 2 and vice
I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor versa with command 1.
direction. Each input on the function block is specific for a
certain fault type and therefore must be connected to a IED commands with position and select for IEC 60870-5-103
correspondent signal present in the configuration. For I103POSCMD
example: 68_TRGEN represents the General Trip of the I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that are
device and must be connected to the general trip signal getting the position value as an integer (for example, from the
SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent. POSITION output of the SCSWI function block) and sending it
over IEC 60870-5-103 (1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE). The standard
IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED does not define the use of values 0 and 3. However, when
I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in connected to a switching device, these values are
monitor direction. This block uses the parameter transmitted.
FunctionType; the information number parameter is defined
for each input signal. The BLOCK input will block only the signals in monitoring
direction (the position information), not the commands via IEC
Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is used to indicate that the
I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions for monitored apparatus has been selected (in a select-before-
supervision indications in monitor direction. This block operate type of control).
includes the FunctionType parameter; the information number
parameter is defined for each output signal. DNP3.0 communication protocol
SEMOD153688-5 v3
An electrical RS485 serial port, optical serial ports on the
Status for user-defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication module (SLM), optical Ethernet ports
I103USRDEF are available for DNP3.0 communication. DNP3.0 Level 2
I103USRDEF comprises function blocks with user-defined communication with unsolicited events, time synchronization
input signals in monitor direction. These function blocks and disturbance reporting is provided for communication to
include the FunctionType parameter for each block in the RTUs, Gateways or HMI systems.
private range, and the information number parameter for each
input signal. Multiple command and transmit
M14791-3 v3
When IEDs are used in Substation Automation systems with
Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD LON, SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocols, the
I103CMD is a command function block in control direction Event and Multiple Command function blocks are used as the
with pre-defined output signals. The signals are in steady communication interface for vertical communication to station
state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in case of restart. HMI and gateway, and as interface for horizontal peer-to-peer
communication (over LON only).
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction with
defined IED functions. All outputs are pulsed and they are 21. Remote communication
NOT stored. Pulse-time is a hidden parameter.
Analog and binary signal transfer to remote end
M12449-6 v3
Function commands user-defined for IEC 60870-5-103 Three analog and eight binary signals can be exchanged
I103USRCMD between two IEDs. This functionality is mainly used for the
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction with line differential protection. However it can be used in other
user-defined output signals. These function blocks include products as well. An IED can communicate with up to 4
the FunctionType parameter for each block in the private remote IEDs.
52 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Binary input module BIM

Binary signal transfer M1769-3 v4
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and
SEMOD52522-4 v8
The remote end data communication is used for the is available in two versions, one standard and one with
transmission of analog values for line differential protection or enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs to be
for the transmission of only binary signals between IEDs. The used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are
binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used freely programmable and can be used for the input of logical
for any purpose, such as communication scheme related signals to any of the functions. They can also be included in
signals, transfer trip and/or other binary signals between the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This
IEDs. enables extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of
the IED and for all associated electrical circuits.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is
equipped with a Line Data Communication Module (LDCM). Binary output module BOM
The LDCM then acts as an interface to 64 kbit/s and 2Mbit/s M6938-3 v4
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays
communication channels for duplex communication between and is used for trip output or any signaling purpose.
the IEDs. In 2Mbit/s mode, each LDCM can send and receive
up to 9 analog and up to 192 binary signals simultaneously. Static binary output module SOM
SEMOD174196-4 v4
In 64kbit/s mode, the LDCM can be configured to work in The static binary output module has six fast static outputs
either analog mode or binary mode. In analog mode, the IED and six change over output relays for use in applications with
can send and receive up to 3 analog signals and up to 8 high speed requirements.
binary signals. In binary mode, the LDCM can send and
receive only binary data (up to 192 binary signals). Binary input/output module IOM
M6939-3 v6
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input
The IED can be equipped with up to four short range, medium and output channels are needed. The ten standard output
range or long range LDCMs. channels are used for trip output or any signaling purpose.
The two high speed signal output channels are used for
Line data communication module, short, medium and long applications where short operating time is essential. Eight
range LDCM optically isolated binary inputs cater for required binary input
SEMOD168481-4 v10
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for information.
communication between the IEDs situated at a distance <110
km/68 miles or from the IED to the optical-to-electrical mA input module MIM
M15020-3 v4
converter with G.703 or G.703E1 interface located at a The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer
distance < 3 km/1.9 miles away. The LDCM module sends signals in the –20 to +20 mA range from for example OLTC
and receives data to and from another LDCM module. The position, temperature or pressure transducers. The module
IEEE/ANSI C37.94 standard format is used. has six independent, galvanically separated channels.
Galvanic interface G.703 resp G.703E1 Optical Ethernet module

M16035-3 v5 M16073-3 v8
The external galvanic data communication converter G. The optical Ethernet module (OEM) provides two additional
703/G.703E1 makes an optical-to-galvanic conversion for optical ethernet ports. The port connectors are of LC type.
connection to a multiplexer. These units are designed for 64
kbit/s resp 2Mbit/s operation. The converter is delivered with Serial and LON communication module (SLM) for SPA/IEC
19” rack mounting accessories. 60870-5-103, LON and DNP 3.0
M14933-3 v6
The Serial and LON communication module (SLM) is used for
SPA, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON communication. SLM
22. Hardware description has two optical communication ports for plastic/plastic,
plastic/glass or glass/glass fiber cables. One port is used for
Hardware modules
IP14529-1 v1
serial communication (SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 port)
Numeric processing module NUM
M12643-3 v4
and the other port is used for LON communication.
The numeric processing module (NUM) is a CPU module that
handles all protection functions and logic. Line data communication module LDCM
M16075-3 v5
Each module has one optical port, one for each remote end
NUM provides up to 4 optical (type LC) or galvanic (type
to which the IED communicates.
RJ45) Ethernet ports(one basic and three optional).
Alternative modules for Long range (1550 nm single mode),
Power supply module PSM
M11595-3 v6
Medium range (1310 nm single mode) and Short range (850
The power supply module is used to provide the correct
nm multi mode) are available.
internal voltages and full isolation between the IED and the
battery system. An internal fail alarm output is available. Galvanic RS485 serial communication module
SEMOD158664-5 v3
The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is used
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can
for DNP3.0 and IEC 60870-5-103 communication. The
be ordered.
ABB 53
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M15243-4 v7
module has one RS485 communication port. The RS485 is a
balanced serial communication that can be used either in 2-
wire or 4-wire connections. A 2-wire connection uses the
same signal for RX and TX and is a multidrop communication
with no dedicated Master or slave. This variant requires
E
however a control of the output. The 4-wire connection has
separated signals for RX and TX multidrop communication
with a dedicated Master and the rest are slaves. No special
control signal is needed in this case.
GPS time synchronization module GTM A

M14851-3 v5 D
This module includes a GPS receiver used for time
synchronization. The GTM has one SMA contact for
connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS ST-
connector output.
IRIG-B Time synchronizing module

SEMOD141113-4 v8
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for accurate
B
time synchronizing of the IED from a station clock. C
Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and 12X
IRIG-B support.
Transformer input module TRM IEC08000163 V2 EN-US
M14875-3 v9
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate Figure 19. Case with rear cover
and adapt the secondary currents and voltages generated by
the measuring transformers. The module has twelve inputs in
different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type can

be ordered.
K
High impedance resistor unit
M16727-3 v2
The high impedance resistor unit, with resistors for pick-up F
value setting and a voltage dependent resistor, is available in
a single phase unit and a three phase unit. Both are mounted
on a 1/1 19 inch apparatus plate with compression type
terminals.
Layout and dimensions

IP14539-1 v1
Dimensions
IP14826-1 v1
G
J
H
Figure 20. Case with rear cover and 19” rack mounting kit
54 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M15243-12 v9
Figure 21. A 1/2 x 19” size IED side-by-side with RHGS6.
Case size A B C D E F G H J K
(mm)/(inches)
6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9/ 223.7/ 242.1/ 255.8/ 205.7/ 190.5/ 203.7/ - 228.6/ -
10.47 8.81 9.53 10.07 8.10 7.50 8.02 9.00
6U, 3/4 x 19” 265.9/ 336.0/ 242.1/ 255.8/ 318.0/ 190.5/ 316.0/ - 228.6/ -
10.47 13.23 9.53 10.07 12.52 7.50 12.4 9.00
6U, 1/1 x 19” 265.9/ 448.3/ 242.1/ 255.8/ 430.3/ 190.5/ 428.3/ 465.1/ 228.6/ 482.6/19.00
10.47 17.65 9.53 10.07 16.86 7.50 16.86 18.31 9.00
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit.
Mounting alternatives See ordering for details about available mounting alternatives.
M16079-3 v14
• 19” rack mounting kit
• Flush mounting kit with cut-out dimensions:
– 1/2 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 210.1 mm/
8.27”
– 3/4 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 322.4 mm/
12.69”
– 1/1 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 434.7 mm/
17.11”
• Wall mounting kit
ABB 55
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
23. Connection diagrams Connection diagram, RED670 2.2, B33X00 1MRK002807-DF

GUID-CF4EFFA5-3081-4FC7-9A14-ED127C3C0FDE v7
The connection diagrams are delivered in the IED Connectivity
package as part of the product delivery. Connection diagram, RED670 2.2, A42X00 1MRK002807-DG
The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be Connection diagram, RED670 2.2, B42X00 1MRK002807-DH
downloaded from http://www.abb.com/protection-control.
Connection diagram, RED670 2.2, C42X00 1MRK002807-DK
Connection diagrams for IEC Customized products
Connection diagrams for ANSI Customized products
Connection diagram, 670 series 2.2 1MRK002801-AG
Connection diagram, 670 series 2.2 1MRK002802-AG
Connection diagrams for Configured products
56 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
24. Technical data
General
M10993-1 v3 IP11376-1 v2
Definitions
Reference value The specified value of an influencing factor to which are referred the characteristics of the equipment
Nominal range The range of values of an influencing quantity (factor) within which, under specified conditions, the equipment meets the
specified requirements
Operative range The range of values of a given energizing quantity for which the equipment, under specified conditions, is able to perform its
intended functions according to the specified requirements
Presumptions for Technical Data 6. Parameter SBase used by the tested function is set
GUID-1E949E38-E04D-4374-A086-912C25E9F93C v2
The technical data stated in this document are only valid equal to:
under the following circumstances: – √3 × IBase × UBase
7. The rated secondary quantities have the following
1. Main current transformers with 1 A or 2 A secondary values:
rating are wired to the IED 1 A rated CT inputs. – Rated secondary phase current I r is either 1 A or 5 A
2. Main current transformer with 5 A secondary rating are
depending on selected TRM.
wired to the IED 5 A rated CT inputs.
– Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage U r is within
3. CT and VT ratios in the IED are set in accordance with
the range from 100 V to 120 V.
the associated main instrument transformers. Note that
– Rated secondary power for three-phase system S r =
for functions which measure an analogue signal which
√3 × U r × Ir
do not have corresponding primary quantity the 1:1 ratio
shall be set for the used analogue inputs on the IED. 8. For operate and reset time testing, the default setting
Example of such functions are: HZPDIF, ROTIPHIZ and values of the function are used if not explicitly stated
STTIPHIZ. otherwise.
4. Parameter IBase used by the tested function is set 9. During testing, signals with rated frequency have been
equal to the rated CT primary current. injected if not explicitly stated otherwise.
5. Parameter UBase used by the tested function is set
equal to the rated primary phase-to-phase voltage.
ABB 57
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Energizing quantities, rated values and limits

Analog inputs
M16988-1 v11 IP15842-1 v1
Table 10. TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A
Operating range (0-100) x Ir
Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)

30 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min
4 × Ir continuously
Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave
Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A
*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.
Voltage inputs **)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V
Operating range 0 - 340 V
Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s

420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V

< 80 mVA at 220 V
**) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
58 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 11. TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer
Description Value
Frequency
Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz
Operating range fr ± 10%
Current inputs
Rated current Ir 1A 5A
Operating range (0-1.8) × Ir (0-1.6) × Ir
Thermal withstand 80 × Ir for 1 s 65 × Ir for 1 s

25 × Ir for 10 s 20 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min 8 × Ir for 1 min
1.8 × Ir for 30 min 1.6 × Ir for 30 min
1.1 × Ir continuously 1.1 × Ir continuously
Burden < 200 mVA at Ir < 350 mVA at Ir
Voltage inputs *)
Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V
Operating range 0 - 340 V
Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s

420 V continuously
Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V

< 80 mVA at 220 V
*) all values for individual voltage inputs
Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
M6389-1 v5
Table 12. MIM - mA input module
Quantity: Rated value: Nominal range:
Input resistance Rin = 194 Ohm -
Input range ±5, ±10, ±20 mA -

0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20 mA
Power consumption -
each mA board £2W
each mA input £ 0.1 W
Auxiliary DC voltage
M12286-1 v8 IP15843-1 v3
Table 13. PSM - Power supply module
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Auxiliary DC voltage, EL (input) EL = (24-60) V EL ±20%

EL = (100-250) V EL ±20%
Power consumption 50 W typically -
Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -
Supply interruption bridging time < 50 ms -
ABB 59
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Binary inputs and outputs

M12576-1 v11 IP15844-1 v1
Table 14. BIM - Binary input module
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%

48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz

Release settable 1–30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1–20 ms
Binary input operate time 3 ms -

(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)
Maximum 176 binary input channels may The stated operate time for functions
be activated simultaneously with influencing include the operating time for the binary
factors within nominal range. inputs and outputs.
M50609-2 v8
Table 15. BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Binary inputs 16 -

48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz

Release settable 1–30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

60 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M12573-1 v10
Table 16. IOM - Binary input/output module
Binary inputs 8 -

48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%
Power consumption -
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 Hz

Release settable 1-30 Hz
Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

ABB 61
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M12318-1 v9
Table 17. IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms 800 V DC
Current carrying capacity

Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A 12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R > 10 ms
0.2 s
1.0 s 30 A 0.4 A
10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load

220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A

110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms
Maximum 72 outputs may be activated temperature rise will adversely affect the
simultaneously with influencing factors hardware life. Maximum two relays per
within nominal range. After 6 ms an BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated
additional 24 outputs may be activated. continuously due to power dissipation.
The activation time for the 96 outputs must
not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be
activated during 1 s. Continued activation
is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the
62 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M12584-1 v9
The stated operate time for functions

include the operating time for the binary
inputs and outputs.
Table 18. IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC
Test voltage across open 250 V rms 250 V rms

contact, 1 min

Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous
Making capacity at inductive

loadwith L/R > 10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Making capacity at resistive load

220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A

> 0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A

L/R < 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms
Maximum 72 outputs may be activated temperature rise will adversely affect the
simultaneously with influencing factors hardware life. Maximum two relays per
within nominal range. After 6 ms an BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated
additional 24 outputs may be activated. continuously due to power dissipation.
The activation time for the 96 outputs must
not exceed 200 ms. 48 outputs can be
activated during 1 s. Continued activation
is possible with respect to current
consumption but after 5 minutes the
ABB 63
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
SEMOD175395-2 v8

inputs and outputs.
Table 19. SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs
Function of quantity Static binary output trip
Rated voltage 48-60 VDC 110-250 VDC
Number of outputs 6 6
Impedance open state ~300 kΩ ~810 kΩ
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min No galvanic separation No galvanic separation
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 5A 5A
1.0 s 10 A 10 A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the

maximum capacitance of 0.2 μF :
0.2 s 30 A 30 A
1.0 s 10 A 10 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A
60 V/0.75 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Operating time < 1 ms < 1 ms
Table 20. SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Electromechanical relay outputs
Function of quantity Trip and signal relays
Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC
Number of outputs 6
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity:
Continuous 8A
1.0 s 10 A
Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum capacitance of

0.2 μF:
0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Operating time < 6 ms
64 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M12441-1 v9

inputs and outputs.
Table 21. BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms

Per relay, continuous 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R > 10 ms

0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A

110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Operating time < 6 ms

inputs and outputs.
Influencing factors
M16705-1 v15 IP15846-1 v1
Table 22. Temperature and humidity influence
Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence
Ambient temperature, operate +20°C -25°C to +55°C 0.02%/°C

value
Relative humidity 10-90% 10-90% -

Operative range 0-95%
Storage temperature - -40°C to +70°C -
ABB 65
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 23. Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation
Dependence on Reference value Within nominal Influence

range
Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01%/%

Operative range Full wave rectified
Auxiliary voltage dependence, operate ±20% of EL 0.01%/%

value
Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC ± 20%
100-250 V DC ±20%
Interruption
interval
0–50 ms No restart
0–∞ s Correct behaviour at power down
Restart time < 300 s
Table 24. Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)
Dependence on Within nominal range Influence
Frequency dependence, operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±1.0%/Hz

fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
Frequency dependence for distance protection operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±2.0%/Hz
fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz
Harmonic frequency dependence (20% content) 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±2.0%
Harmonic frequency dependence for distance protection (10% 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
content)
Harmonic frequency dependence for high impedance differential 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
protection (10% content)
Harmonic frequency dependence for overcurrent protection 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±3.0%
Type tests according to standards

M16706-1 v13 IP15778-1 v1
66 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 25. Electromagnetic compatibility
Test Type test values Reference standards
1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26
100 kHz slow damped oscillatory wave immunity test 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Class III
Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class IV
Surge withstand capability test 2.5 kV, oscillatory IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1

4.0 kV, fast transient
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26

Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV
Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.1

Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge
Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A

2 kV, SFP galvanic RJ45
2 kV, MIM mA-inputs IEC 60255-26, Zone B
Surge immunity test 2-4 kV, 1.2/50ms high energy IEC 60255-26, Zone A
1-2 kV, BOM and IRF outputs IEC 60255-26, Zone B
Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A
Conducted common mode immunity test 15 Hz-150 kHz IEC 61000-4-16, Class IV
Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Class V
100 A/m, cont.
Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000 A/m IEC 61000–4–9, Class V
Damped oscillatory magnetic field test 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Class V
Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance 20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-26
1.4-2.7 GHz
Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance 20 V/m IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2

80-1000 MHz
10 V/m, 5.1-6.0 GHz EN 50121-5
Conducted electromagnetic field disturbance 10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEC 60255-26
Radiated emission 30-5000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC
Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26
Table 26. Insulation
Test Type test values Reference standard
Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27

(SFP galvanic RJ45: 1.0 ANSI C37.90
kVrms, 1 min.) IEEE 802.3-2015,
Environment A
Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50ms, 0.5 J
1 kV, 1.2/50 ms 0.5 J, SFP
galvanic RJ45
Insulation resistance > 100 MW at 500 VDC
ABB 67
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 27. Environmental tests
Test Type test value Reference standard
Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1
Cold storage test Test Ab for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1
Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2
Dry heat storage test Test Bb for 16 h at +85°C IEC 60068-2-2
Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25°C to +70°C IEC 60068-2-14
Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 10 days at +40°C and humidity 93% IEC 60068-2-78
Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55°C and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = IEC 60068-2-30
24 hours)
Table 28. CE compliance
Test According to
Immunity EN 60255–26
Emissivity EN 60255–26
Low voltage directive EN 60255–27
Table 29. Mechanical tests
Test Type test values Reference standards
Vibration response test Class II IEC 60255-21-1
Vibration endurance test Class I IEC 60255-21-1
Shock response test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Shock withstand test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Bump test Class I IEC 60255-21-2
Seismic test Class II IEC 60255-21-3
68 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Differential protection
M13062-1 v20
Table 30. Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operating characteristic Adaptable ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -
Minimum pickup, IdMin (4.0-100.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Directional characteristic Fixed 180 degrees or ±60 to ±90 ±2.0 degrees

degrees
Operate time, trip at 0 to 10 x IdMin Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, trip at 10 x IdMin to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Second harmonic blocking 60.0% of fundamental (hidden ±1.0% of Ir

setting)
M13081-1 v12
Table 31. High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF
Operate voltage (10-900) V ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

I=U/R ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio >95% at (30-900) V -
Maximum continuous power U>Trip2/SeriesResistor ≤200 W -
Operate time at 0 to 10 x Ud Min. = 5 ms

Max. = 15 ms
Reset time at 10 x Ud to 0 Min. = 75 ms

Max. = 95 ms
Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Ud Min. = 25 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at 2 x Ud to 0 Min. = 50 ms

Max. = 70 ms
Critical impulse time 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud -
ABB 69
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M16023-1 v9
Table 32. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF
Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

SlopeSection2 (10.0-50.0)% -
EndSection 1 (20–150)% of IBase -
EndSection 2 (100–1000)% of IBase -
Unrestrained limit function (100–5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Second harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±1.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir
Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

*Inverse characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 184,186 and table 188
184,186 and table 188
Critical impulse time 2ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -
Charging current compensation On/Off -
LT3CPDIF and LT6CPDIF (With in-zone transformer enabled and tIdMinHigh set to 0) :
*Operate time, restrained function at 0 to Min. = 25 ms -

10 x IdMin Max. = 35 ms
*Reset time, restrained function at 10 x Min. = 5 ms -

IdMin to 0 Max. = 15 ms
*Operate time, unrestrained function at 0 Min. = 5 ms -

to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 15 ms
*Reset time, unrestrained function at 10 Min. = 15 ms -

x IdUnre to 0 Max. = 30 ms
**Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

sequence function Max. = 25 ms
**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

L3CPDIF and L6CPDIF (With tIdMinHigh set to 0):
*Operate time, restrained function at 0 to Min. = 10 ms -

10 x IdMin Max. = 20 ms
*Reset time, restrained function at 10 x Min. = 15 ms -

IdMin to 0 Max. = 25 ms
*Operate time, unrestrained function at 0 Min. = 5 ms -

to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 15 ms
*Reset time, unrestrained function at 10 Min. = 15 ms -

x IdUnre to 0 Max. = 30 ms
70 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 32. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF, continued
**Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

The data in the table are valid for a single IED with two local current input groups.
*Note: Data obtained with single input current group.
**Note: Data obtained with two input current groups. The rated symmetrical currents are applied on both sides as pre- and after-fault currents.
The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to double on one side and decreasing same phase current to zero on the other side.
GUID-6746298E-4C29-44C6-AB59-41EBF408A5E4 v2
Table 33. High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line ends L4CPDIF

EndSection1 (20–200)% of IBase -
EndSection2 (100–1000)% of IBase -
Unrestrained limit function (100–10000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Second harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±1.0% of Ir

Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±3.0% of Ir

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Id -
Operate time with two input groups' Min. = 10 ms -

currents, restrained function, in a 50 Max. = 20 ms
Hz system1)
Operate time with two input groups' Min. = 8 ms -

currents, restrained function, in a 60 Max. = 17 ms
1)
Hz system
Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 10 ms -

0 to 10 x IdMin, in a 50 Hz system
2)
Max. = 20 ms
Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 8 ms -

0 to 10 x IdMin, in a 60 Hz system
2)
Max. = 17 ms
Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 15 ms -

x IdMin to 0
2)
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 5 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre2) Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 25 ms -

10 x IdUnre to 0
2)
Max. = 35 ms
1) This data is obtained by applying two input groups' currents to simulate an internal fault with default settings. Ir is applied to both input groups as pre- and after-fault currents. The fault
is performed by simultaneously increasing one group's currents to 10 x IdMin and decreasing the other group's currents to 0.
2) This data is obtained by applying one input group's currents only.
ABB 71
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-0BD8D3C9-620A-426C-BDB5-DAA0E4F8247F v4
Table 34. Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC
Operate current, zero sequence current (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir
Operate current, low current operation (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir
Operate voltage, phase to neutral (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate voltage, phase to phase (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Independent time delay, zero sequence current at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater
Independent time delay, low current operation at 2 x Iset to 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 40 ms

Independent time delay, low voltage operation at 2 x Uset to 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
Reset time delay for startup signal at 0 to 2 x Uset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
72 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Impedance protection
M13842-1 v15
Table 35. Distance measuring zone, Quad ZMQPDIS
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable -

direction
Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -

current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, (10-1000)% of IBase -

phase-to-phase and phase-to-
earth
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) Ω/phase
Conditions:
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) Ω/phase Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth (0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase (0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -

measured with CVT’s and
0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Ph-E operation
Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 x Min. = 20 ms -

Zreach Max. = 50 ms
ABB 73
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
SEMOD173239-2 v10
Table 36. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -

current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (10-1000)% of IBase -

and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Fault resistance, Ph-E (0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph (0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -

with CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is greater

Ph-E operation

Zreach Max. = 50 ms
M16024-1 v12
Table 37. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS

Reactive reach, positive (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.5% static accuracy

sequence ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Resistive reach, positive (0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
sequence
Reactive reach, zero sequence (0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Resistive reach, zero sequence (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth (1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop

faults, forward and reverse
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase (0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop

faults, forward and reverse
Load encroachment criteria:

Load resistance, forward and (1.00–3000.00) Ω/phase
reverse (5-70) degrees
Safety load impedance angle
74 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
SEMOD173242-2 v14
Table 38. Full-scheme distance protection, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS
Number of zones, Ph-E Max 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate current (10–30)% of IBase -
Positive sequence impedance, (0.005–3000.000) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Ph-E loop Conditions:
Positive sequence impedance (10–90) degrees
angle, Ph-E loop
Angle: 85 degrees
Reverse reach, Ph-E loop (0.005–3000.000) Ω/phase
(Magnitude)
Magnitude of earth return (0.00–3.00)

compensation factor KN
Angle for earth compensation (-180–180) degrees

factor KN

with CVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Ph-E operation
Reset time at 0.5 x Zreach to 1.5 Min. = 30 ms -

x Zreach Max. = 50 ms
SEMOD173249-2 v8
Table 39. Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate current (10-30)% of IBase -
Positive sequence reactance (0.50-3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Fault resistance, Ph-E (1.00-9000.00) W/loop

with CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Ph-E operation

Zreach Max. = 50 ms
ABB 75
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
SEMOD153649-2 v8
Table 40. Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS
Load encroachment criteria: (1.00–3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Load resistance, forward and (5–70) degrees Conditions:
reverse Voltage range: (0.1–1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5–30) x Ir
GUID-7617A215-AE7C-47CC-B189-4914F530F717 v7
Table 41. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS
Number of zones Max 5 with selectable -

direction

current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, phase- (10-1000)% of IBase -

to-phase and phase-to-earth
Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/ ±2.0% static accuracy

phase ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) Ω/
phase
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) Ω/ Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
phase
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/

phase
Fault resistance, phase-to-earth (0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, phase-to-phase (0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -

measured with CVT’s
and 0.5<SIR<30
Definite time delay phase-phase (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

and phase-earth operation

Zreach Max. =50 ms
76 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-9E13C38A-3B6D-402B-98A6-6CDA20632CE7 v5
Table 42. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS

Reactive reach, positive (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

sequence ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Resistive reach, positive (0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase
sequence
Reactive reach, zero sequence (0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Resistive reach, zero sequence (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, Ph-E faults, (1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop

forward and reverse
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph faults, (0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop

forward and reverse
ABB 77
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-6C2EF52A-8166-4A23-9861-38931682AA7D v7
Table 43. High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS
Number of zones 3 selectable -

directions, 3 fixed
directions
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (5-6000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance (0.01 - 3000.00) Pseudo continuous ramp:

reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ohm/p ±2.0% of set value
Conditions:
Positive sequence resistance (0.00 - 1000.00)
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ohm/p
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Ramp of shots:
Zero sequence reactance reach (0.01 - 9000.00) Angle: At 0 degrees and 85 degrees ±2.0% of set value
ohm/p IEC 60255-121 points A,B,C,D,E Conditions:
IEC 60255-121 point B
Zero sequence resistive reach (0.00 - 3000.00)
ohm/p
Fault resistance reach, Ph-E and (0.01 -9000.00) ohm/l

Ph-Ph
Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 degrees -

measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30,
IEC 60255-121
Directional blinders Forward: -15 – 120 Pseudo continuous ramp:

degrees ±2.0 degrees, IEC 60255-121
Reverse: 165 – -60
degrees
Resistance determining the load (0.01 - 5000.00) Pseudo continuous ramp: Ramp of shots:
impedance area - forward ohm/p ±2.0% of set value ±5.0% of set value
Conditions: Conditions:
Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees
Angle determining the load 5 - 70 degrees Pseudo continuous ramp:

impedance area ±2.0 degrees
Conditions:
Tested at RLdFw = 20 ohm/p
Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% of set value or ±35 ms whichever is greater
and Ph-Ph operation
Operate time 16 ms typically, IEC -

60255-121
Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
78 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M16036-1 v10
Table 44. Power swing detection ZMRPSB
Reactive reach (0.10-3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Resistive reach (0.10–1000.00) W/loop
Power swing detection operate (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±10 ms whichever is greater

time
Second swing reclaim operate (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater

time
Minimum operate current (5-30)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

SEMOD171935-5 v5
Table 45. Power swing logic PSLPSCH
Permitted maximum (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

operating time difference
between higher and lower
zone
Delay for operation of (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

underreach zone with
detected difference in
operating time
Conditional timer for sending (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
the CS at power swings
Conditional timer for tripping (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
at power swings
Timer for blocking the (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
overreaching zones trip
GUID-88E02516-1BFE-4075-BEEB-027484814697 v2
Table 46. Pole slip protection PSPPPAM
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/Ir
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -

SEMOD175136-2 v8
Table 47. Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM
Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/(√3 ⋅ Ir)
Rotor start angle (90.0 - 130.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees
Rotor trip angle (15.0 - 90.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees
Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip counters (1 - 20) -
ABB 79
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-BACA37F7-E945-40BC-BF9D-A65BFC96CA91 v8
Table 48. Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ
Operate value, phase-to-phase (1 - 100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage
Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -
Operate value, residual voltage (5 - 300)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -
Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -
Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
residual current at 0 to 2 x Iset
residual voltage at 0.8 x Uset to
1.2 x Uset
Independent dropoff-delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater

residual voltage at 1.2 x Uset to
0.8 x Uset
Operating mode No Filter, NoPref

Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a,
321a
80 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-42119BFF-1756-431C-A5A1-0AB637213E96 v1
Table 49. Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ
Operate value, phase-to-phase (1 - 100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage
Operate value, residual voltage (5 - 300)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -
Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

residual current at 0 to 2 x Iset
residual voltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x
Uset
Independent dropoff-delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater

residual voltage at 1.2 to 0.8 x
Uset
Operating mode No Filter, NoPref

Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a,
321a
M16043-1 v12
Table 50. Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF
Parameter Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, detection of dead line (1–100)% of ±0.5% of Ur

UBase
Operate current, detection of dead line (1–100)% of ±1.0% of Ir

IBase
Time delay to operate for the switch onto fault (0.03-120.00) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
function
Time delay for UI detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
Delay time for activation of dead line detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
Drop-off delay time of switch onto fault function (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
ABB 81
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Wide area measurement system

GUID-F0BAEBD8-E361-4D50-9737-7DF8B043D66A v4
Table 51. Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 PMUREPORT
Influencing quantity Range Accuracy
Signal frequency ± 0.1 x fr ≤ 1.0% TVE
Signal magnitude:
Voltage phasor (0.1–1.2) x Ur
Current phasor (0.5–2.0) x Ir
Phase angle ± 180°
Harmonic distortion 10% from 2nd – 50th
Interfering signal:
Magnitude 10% of fundamental signal
Minimum frequency 0.1 x fr
Maximum frequency 1000 Hz
82 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Current protection
M12336-1 v13
Table 52. Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -
Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Max. = 15 ms

Max. = 40 ms
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -
ABB 83
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M12342-1 v21
Table 53. Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC
Operate current, step 1-4 (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -
Minimum operate current, step 1-4 (1-10000)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.0–65.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.0–89.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
1-4
Minimum operate time for inverse curves , (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
step 1-4
Inverse time characteristics, see table 183, 16 curve types See table 183, table 185 and table 187
table 185 and table 187
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -

Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms

Iset Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Iset to Min. = 20 ms -

0 Max. = 35 ms
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -
Operate frequency, directional overcurrent 38-83 Hz -
Operate frequency, non-directional 10-90 Hz -

overcurrent
84 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M12340-2 v9
Table 54. Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC
Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Max. = 25 ms

Max. = 25 ms

Max. = 15 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -
ABB 85
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M15223-1 v17
Table 55. Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC
Operate current, step 1-4 (1-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of IBase -
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

(RCA)
Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
1-4
Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
step 1-4
Inverse time characteristics, see Table 183, 16 curve types See Table 183, Table 185 and Table 187
Table 185 and Table 187
Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Real part of source Z used for current (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

polarization
Imaginary part of source Z used for current (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -

polarization

Iset Max. = 30 ms

0 Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to 10 Min. = 5 ms -

x Iset Max. = 20 ms

0 Max. = 35 ms
86 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-E83AD807-8FE0-4244-A50E-86B9AF92469E v6
Table 56. Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC
Operate current, step 1 - 4 (1-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

step 1 - 4
step 1 - 4
Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 183, table 185 and table 187
183, table 185 and table 187
Minimum operate current, step 1 - 4 (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Real part of negative sequence source (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

impedance used for current polarization
Imaginary part of negative sequence (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -

source impedance used for current
polarization
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 15 ms -

2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

to 0 Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 5 ms -

10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Min. = 20 ms -

Iset to 0 Max. = 35 ms
Transient overreach <10% at τ = 100 ms -
ABB 87
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
SEMOD173350-2 v16
Table 57. Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE
Operate level for 3I0·cosj directional residual (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Operate level for ·3I0·3U0 cosj directional (0.25-200.00)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S £ Sr

residual power ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
Operate level for 3I0 and j residual (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at £ Ir

Operate level for non-directional overcurrent (1.00-400.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

Operate level for non-directional residual (1.00-200.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Residual release current for all directional (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

modes ±1.0% of I at I > Ir
Residual release voltage for all directional (1.00-300.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

modes ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Operate time for non-directional residual Min. = 40 ms

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 65 ms
Reset time for non-directional residual Min. = 40 ms

overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0
Max. = 65 ms
Operate time for directional residual Min. = 110 ms

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 160 ms
Reset time for directional residual overcurrent Min. = 20 ms

at 2 x Iset to 0
Max. = 60 ms
Independent time delay for non-directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever is greater
residual overvoltage at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset
Independent time delay for non-directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever is greater
residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Independent time delay for directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 170 ms whichever is greater
residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Inverse characteristics, see table 192, 16 curve types See Table 192, Table 193 and Table 194
Table 193 and Table 194
Relay characteristic angle (RCADir) (-179 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (ROADir) (0 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees
88 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M12352-1 v15
Table 58. Thermal overload protection, one time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR
Reference current (2-400)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Reference temperature (0-300)°C, (0 - 600)°F ±1.0°C, ±2.0°F
Operate time: Time constant t = (1–1000) IEC 60255-149, ±5.0% or ±200 ms whichever is greater
minutes
 
 I , Ip
2 2 
t < σ ln  
 2 TTrip , TAmb 2 
I , T √ I ref

 ref 
EQUATION13000039 V3 EN-US (Equation 1)
TTrip= set operate temperature

TAmb = ambient temperature
Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load current
I = actual measured current
Ip = load current before overload occurs
Alarm temperature (0-200)°C, (0-400)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F
Operate temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F
Reset level temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F

M12353-1 v14
Table 59. Breaker failure protection CCRBRF
Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -
Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

Phase current level for blocking of contact function (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
Reset ratio > 95% -
Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -
Reset time for current detection 15 ms maximum -
Time delay for re-trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Time delay for back-up trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Time delay for back-up trip at multi-phase start at (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
0 to 2 x Iset
Additional time delay for a second back-up trip at (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
0 to 2 x Iset
Time delay for alarm for faulty circuit breaker (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
ABB 89
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M12350-1 v12
Table 60. Stub protection STBPTOC
Operating current (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 20 ms

M13279-1 v10
Table 61. Pole discordance protection CCPDSC
Operate current (0–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is greater

between trip condition and trip
signal
SEMOD175152-2 v11
Table 62. Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
where
S r = 1.732 × U r × I r
Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Independent time delay to operate for Step 1 (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
and Step 2 at 2 x Sr to 0.5 x Sr and k=0.000
90 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
SEMOD175159-2 v9
Table 63. Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP
Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2
Operate time, start at 0.5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and Min. =10 ms

k=0.000
Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Sr to 0.5 x Sr and Min. = 35 ms

k=0.000
Max. = 55 ms
Independent time delay to operate for Step 1 (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
and Step 2 at 0.5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and k=0.000
SEMOD175200-2 v7
Table 64. Broken conductor check BRCPTOC
Minimum phase current for operation (5–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Unbalance current operation (50–90)% of maximum current ±1.0% of Ir
Independent operate time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
Independent reset time delay (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Start time at current change from Ir to 0 Min. = 25 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
Reset time at current change from 0 to Ir Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 20 ms
ABB 91
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-7EA9731A-8D56-4689-9072-D72D9CDFD795 v8
Table 65. Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC
Start overcurrent (2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -
Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 10 x Min. = 5 ms -

Iset Max. = 20 ms
Reset time, start overcurrent at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
Independent time delay to operate at 0 to 2 x (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Iset
Inverse time characteristics, 13 curve types See tables 183 and 185
see tables 183 and 185
Minimum operate time for inverse time (0.00 - 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
characteristics
High voltage limit, voltage dependent (30.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur

operation
Start undervoltage (2.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate time start undervoltage at 2 x Uset to Min. = 15 ms -

0
Max. = 30 ms
Reset time start undervoltage at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to operate, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
undervoltage at 2 x Uset to 0
Internal low voltage blocking (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur
Overcurrent: -
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically
Undervoltage: -
Critical impulse time 10ms typically at 2 x Uset to 0
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically
92 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Voltage protection
M13290-1 v15
Table 66. Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
Operate voltage, low and high step (1.0–100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Internal blocking level, step 1 and step 2 (1–50)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Inverse time characteristics for step 1 - See table 198

and step 2, see table 198
Definite time delay, step 1 at 1.2 x Uset to (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is greater
0
Definite time delay, step 2 at 1.2 x Uset to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is greater
0
Minimum operate time, inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±0.5% or ±40ms whichever is greater

characteristics
Operate time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0 -
ABB 93
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M13304-1 v14
Table 67. Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV
Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Inverse time characteristics for steps 1 and - See table 197

2, see table 197
Definite time delay, low step (step 1) at 0 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
to 1.2 x Uset
Definite time delay, high step (step 2) at 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
to 1.2 x Uset
Minimum operate time, Inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

characteristics
Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -
94 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M13317-2 v14
Table 68. Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV
Operate voltage, step 1 - step 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur
Inverse time characteristics for low and - See table 199

high step, see table 199
Definite time delay low step (step 1) at 0 (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is greater
to 1.2 x Uset
Definite time delay high step (step 2) at 0 (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is greater
to 1.2 x Uset
Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is greater

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms
Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

M13338-2 v11
Table 69. Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH
Operate value, start (100–180)% of (UBase/frated) ±0.5% of U
Operate value, alarm (50–120)% of start level ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Operate value, high level (100–200)% of (UBase/frated) ±0.5% of U
Curve type IEEE or customer defined ±5.0 % or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
(0.18 × k )
IEEE : t =
( M - 1) 2
where M = (E/f)/(Ur/fr)
Minimum time delay for inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
function
Maximum time delay for inverse (0.00–9000.00) s ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
function
Alarm time delay (0.00–9000.00) ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
ABB 95
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
SEMOD166919-2 v7
Table 70. Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV
Voltage difference for alarm and trip (2.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Under voltage level (1.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Independent time delay for voltage (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
differential alarm at 0.8 x UDAlarm to 1.2 x
UDAlarm
differential trip at 0.8 x UDTrip to 1.2 x
UDTrip
differential reset at 1.2 x UDTrip to 0.8 x
UDTrip
SEMOD175210-2 v6
Table 71. Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV
Operate voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Pulse timer when disconnecting (0.050–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

all three phases
Time delay for enabling the (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
functions after restoration
Operate time delay when (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

disconnecting all three phases
Time delay to block when all (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
three phase voltages are not low
GUID-C172D5EB-51E8-4FC9-B2E7-EF976872FD7E v6
Table 72. Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC
Residual current detection (10 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio >95% at (50 - 150)% of IBase -
Operate time, residual current detection at 0 to Min. = 15 ms -

2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to operate, residual (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
current detection at 0 to 2 x Iset
Voltage based phase selection (30 - 100)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur
Reset ratio <115% -
Operate time, voltage-based phase selection Min. = 15 ms -

at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset
Max. = 30 ms
Independent time delay to operate, voltage- (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
based phase selection at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x
Uset
96 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Frequency protection
M13360-1 v15
Table 73. Underfrequency protection SAPTUF
Operate value, start function, at symmetrical three (35.00-75.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz

phase voltage
Operate time, start at fset + 0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz Min. = 80 ms

fn = 50 Hz
Max. = 95 ms
-
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms
Reset time, start at fset - 0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz Min. = 15 ms

-
Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, definite time function at fset + 0.02 Hz (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is greater
to fset - 0.02 Hz
Reset time, definite time function at fset - 0.02 Hz to (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% or ±120 ms whichever is greater
fset + 0.02 Hz
Voltage dependent time delay Settings: ±1.0% or ±100 ms whichever is greater

UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase
UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase
Exponent=0.0-5.0
tMax=(0.010–60.000)s
tMin=(0.010–60.000)s
Exponent
é U - UMin ù
t=ê × ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
ë UNom - UMin úû
U=Umeasured
M14964-1 v12
Table 74. Overfrequency protection SAPTOF
Operate value, start function at symmetrical three-phase voltage (35.00-90.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
Operate time, start at fset -0.02 Hz to fset +0.02 Hz Min. = 80 ms -

fn = 50Hz
Max. = 95 ms
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms
Reset time, start at fset +0.02 Hz to fset -0.02 Hz Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Operate time, definite time function at fset -0.02 Hz to fset +0.02 Hz (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% ±100 ms
Reset time, definite time function at fset +0.02 Hz to fset -0.02 Hz (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% ±120 ms,
ABB 97
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M14976-1 v10
Table 75. Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC
Operate value, start function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s
Operate value, restore enable frequency (45.00-65.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz
Definite restore time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is

greater
Definite time delay for frequency gradient trip (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±120 ms whichever is
greater
Definite reset time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is

greater
98 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Multipurpose protection
M13095-2 v10
ABB 99
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 76. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC
Measuring current input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -

NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2,
phase2-phase3, phase3-phase1,
MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-
Ph
Measuring voltage input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -

NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh, MinPh,
UnbalancePh, phase1-phase2,
phase2-phase3, phase3-phase1,
MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph, UnbalancePh-
Ph
Start overcurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Start undercurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Independent time delay, overcurrent at 0 (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
to 2 x Iset, step 1 - 2
Independent time delay, undercurrent at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
2 x Iset to 0, step 1 - 2
Overcurrent (non-directional):
Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 20 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Undercurrent:
Start time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Overcurrent:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 183, 185 and table 187
183, 185 and table 187
Overcurrent:
step 1 - 2
Voltage level where voltage memory (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

takes over
Start overvoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Start undervoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

100 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 76. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC , continued

Independent time delay, overvoltage at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset, step 1 - 2
Independent time delay, undervoltage at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset, step 1 - 2
Overvoltage:
Start time at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Undervoltage:
Start time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Overvoltage:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 4 curve types See table 197
197
Undervoltage:
Inverse time characteristics, see table 3 curve types See table 198
198
High and low voltage limit, voltage (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
dependent operation, step 1 - 2 ±1.0% of U at U > Ur
Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and -

reverse
Relay characteristic angle (-180 to +180) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -
Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% -
Reset ratio, overvoltage > 95% -
Operate frequency 10-90 Hz -
Overcurrent:
Undercurrent:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 x Iset to 0 -
Overvoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x -

Uset
ABB 101
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 76. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC , continued

Undervoltage:
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x -

Uset
102 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Secondary system supervision

M12358-1 v10
Table 77. Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC
Operate current (10-200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±10.0% of I at I > Ir
Reset ratio, Operate current >90%
Block current (20-500)% of IBase ±5.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of IBase

M16069-1 v12
Table 78. Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC
Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Ur
Operate current change level (1–100)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir
Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate phase current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Operate phase dead line current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir
Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
ABB 103
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-E2EA8017-BB4B-48B0-BEDA-E71FEE353774 v5
Table 79. Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC
Operate value, block of main fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio <110%
Operate time, block of main fuse failure at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 5 ms –
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, block of main fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms –
Max. = 30 ms
Operate value, alarm for pilot fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio <110% –
Operate time, alarm for pilot fuse failure at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 5 ms –
Max. = 15 ms
Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms –
Max. = 30 ms
104 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Control
M12359-1 v15
Table 80. Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check SESRSYN
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -
Voltage high limit for synchronizing and synchrocheck (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -
Frequency difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck (0.003-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
Phase angle difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck (5.0-90.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Voltage difference limit between bus and line for synchronizing and (0.02-0.5) p.u ±0.5% of Ur
synchrocheck
Time delay output for synchrocheck when angle difference between bus (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
and line jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to “PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees greater
Frequency difference minimum limit for synchronizing (0.003-0.250) Hz ±2.5 mHz
Frequency difference maximum limit for synchronizing (0.050-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz
Maximum closing angle between bus and line for synchronizing (15-30) degrees ±2.0 degrees
Breaker closing pulse duration (0.050-1.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is

greater
tMaxSynch, which resets synchronizing function if no close has been (0.000-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
made before set time greater
Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

greater
Voltage high limit for energizing check (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -
Voltage low limit for energizing check (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
Reset ratio, voltage low limit < 105% -
Maximum voltage for energizing (50.0-180.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Time delay for energizing check when voltage jumps from 0 to 90% of (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is
Urated greater
Operate time for synchrocheck function when angle difference between Min. = 15 ms –
bus and line jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to “PhaseDiff” - 2 Max. = 30 ms
degrees
Operate time for energizing function when voltage jumps from 0 to 90% Min. = 70 ms –
of Urated Max. = 90 ms
ABB 105
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M12379-1 v13
Table 81. Autorecloser SMBRREC
Dead time:
shot 1 “t1 1Ph” (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
shot 1 “t1 2Ph” whichever is greater
shot 1 “t1 3Ph “
shot 1 “t1 3PhHS”
Dead time: (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms

shot 2 “t2 3Ph” whichever is greater
shot 3 “t3 3Ph”
shot 4 “t4 3Ph”
shot 5 “t5 3Ph”
Extend three-phase dead time duration “tExtended t1” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
Minimum time that circuit breaker must be closed before new sequence is allowed (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
“tCBClosedMin” whichever is greater
Wait time for the slave to close when WAIT input has reset “tSlaveDeadTime” (0.100-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
Maximum allowed start pulse duration “tLongStartInh” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms

Circuit breaker closing pulse duration “tPulse” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms

Reclaim time ”tReclaim” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms

Maximum wait time for release from master “tWaitForMaster” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
Reset time for reclosing inhibit “tInhibit” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms

Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot “tAutoContWait” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
Maximum wait time for fulfilled synchrocheck conditions “tSync” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
Delay time before indicating successful reclosing “tSuccessful” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±50 ms
Maximum wait time for circuit breaker closing before indicating unsuccessful “tUnsucCl” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
106 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Scheme communication
M16038-1 v14
Table 82. Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking scheme signal transmit ZCPSCH
Scheme type Off -

Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking
Operate voltage, Delta U (0–100)% of UBase ±5.0% of ΔU
Operate current, Delta I (0–200)% of IBase ±5.0% of ΔI
Operate zero sequence voltage, (0–100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Δ3U0

Delta 3U0
Operate zero sequence current, (0–200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Δ3I0

Delta 3I0
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

communication scheme
Minimum duration of a carrier send (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

signal
Security timer for loss of guard (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
signal detection
Operation mode of unblocking logic Off -

NoRestart
Restart
SEMOD166936-2 v7
Table 83. Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection ZC1PPSCH
Scheme type Intertrip -

Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

communication scheme
Minimum duration of a carrier send (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

signal
M16039-1 v16
Table 84. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection ZCRWPSCH
Detection level phase-to-neutral (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

voltage
Detection level phase-to-phase (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

voltage
Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
logic
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

infeed logic
ABB 107
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
SEMOD166938-2 v6
Table 85. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication ZC1WPSCH
Detection level phase to neutral (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

voltage
Detection level phase to phase (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

voltage
Reset ratio <105% at (20-90)% of UBase -
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

infeed logic
M16049-1 v10
Table 86. Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH
Scheme type Permissive Underreaching -

Permissive Overreaching
Blocking
Communication scheme (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater

coordination time
GUID-CC9A02C2-AAE8-4B8C-A091-D4ED584A2EA7 v1
Table 87. Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH
Operate current, LoadCurr (1–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Operate current, MinCurr (1–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Delay time on pick-up for current release (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Delay time on drop-off for current release (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
Delay time on pick-up for MinCurr value (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
M16051-2 v11
Table 88. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH
Operate mode of WEI logic Off -

Echo
Echo & Trip
Operate voltage 3U0 for WEI trip (5-70)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur
logic
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

infeed logic
108 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Direct transfer trip

GUID-B5714FAE-A87D-4C2D-A167-6CB3522CE1D5 v5
Table 89. Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC
Operate value, low active power (2.0-100.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr
Reset ratio, low active power <105% -
Operate value, low power factor 0.00-1.00 ±0.02
Independent time delay to operate for low (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
active power at 1.2 x Pset to 0.8 x Pset
Independent time delay to operate for low (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
power factor at 1.2 x PFset to 0.8 x PFset
Critical impulse time, low active power 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Pset to 0.8 -
x Pset
Impulse margin time, low active power 10 ms typically -

GUID-D9EADF1B-5FC7-4FDB-BF38-95BDBC4D7C3D v5
Table 90. Compensated over- and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC
Operate value, undervoltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0,5% of Ur
Absolute hysteresis (0.00–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

Critical impulse time, undervoltage 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x -

Uset
Impulse margin time, undervoltage 15 ms typically -
Operate value, overvoltage (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U≤Ur

± 0.5% of U at U>Ur
Critical impulse time, overvoltage 10 ms typically at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x -

Uset
Impulse margin time, overvoltage 15 ms typically -
Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

undervoltage functionality at 1.2 x Uset
to 0.8 x Uset
Independent time delay for overvoltage (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
functionality at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset
GUID-4BF21D95-4517-424E-BC23-6156EA0E253C v4
Table 91. Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC
Operate value, overcurrent (5-100)% of IBase ±2.0% of Ir
Hold time for operate signal at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater
ABB 109
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-C99E063D-B377-40D5-8481-9F46D4166AED v3
Table 92. Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC
Operation mode 1 Out Of 2 -

2 Out Of 2
Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

greater
GUID-122A206E-27D2-4D15-AD5A-86B68F1ED559 v5
Table 93. Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV
Operate value, negative sequence (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U≤Ur

overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U>Ur
Reset ratio, negative sequence >95% at (10–200)% of UBase -

overvoltage

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time, negative sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

overvoltage
Impulse margin time, negative sequence 15 ms typically -

overvoltage
Independent time delay to operate at 0 to (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

1.2 x Uset
GUID-7A8E7F49-F079-42A0-8685-20288FAD5982 v5
Table 94. Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV
Operate value, zero sequence (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U > Ur
Reset ratio, zero sequence overvoltage >95% at (10–200)% of UBase -

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 30 ms
Critical impulse time, zero sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

overvoltage
Impulse margin time, zero sequence 15 ms typically -

overvoltage
Independent time delay to operate at 0 to (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

1.2 x Uset
110 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-0E964441-43DE-43B6-B454-485FBBF66B5C v5
Table 95. Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC
Operate value, negative sequence (3 - 2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio, negative sequence overcurrent >95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

Max. = 25 ms

Max. = 25 ms

Max. = 20 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time, negative sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
Impulse margin time, negative sequence 15 ms typically -

overcurrent
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms, whichever is greater
Transient overreach, start function <10% at τ = 100 ms -

GUID-9F739808-04CA-4988-ABBC-1A444297FDB5 v5
Table 96. Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC
Operate value, zero sequence overcurrent (3-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I≤Ir

±1.0% of I at I>Ir
Reset ratio, zero sequence overcurrent >95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 30 ms

Max. = 20 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time, zero sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
Impulse margin time, zero sequence 15 ms typically -

overcurrent
Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
ABB 111
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-C4ACE306-2A54-483D-B247-A479D48CBF5F v5
Table 97. Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC
Operate value, overcurrent (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -

Max. = 25 ms

Max. = 35 ms
Critical impulse time, overcurrent 3 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

1 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset
Impulse margin time, overcurrent 10 ms typically -
Independent time delay to operate at 0 to 2 x (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

Iset
GUID-CE2C6F0A-DF49-4AAF-80F0-9CDCBB08E755 v5
Table 98. Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC
Operate value, undercurrent (1.00-100.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir
Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% at (50.00-100.00)% of -

IBase
Start time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms
Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms
Critical impulse time, undercurrent 10 ms typically at 2 x Iset to 0 -
Impulse margin time, undercurrent 10 ms typically -
Independent time delay to operate at 2 x Iset to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
0
112 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Logic
M12380-1 v13
Table 99. Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC
Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph -
Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
3-pole trip delay (0.020-0.500) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
Evolving fault delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

GUID-1E1A829D-1F26-433A-8813-1F5A6F225418 v1
Table 100. Number of SMAGAPC instances
Function Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SMAGAPC 12 - -
Table 101. Number of STARTCOMB instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
STARTCOMB 32 - -
GUID-3AB1EE95-51BF-4CC4-99BD-F4ECDAACB75A v2
Table 102. Number of TMAGAPC instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TMAGAPC 6 6 -
GUID-A05AF26F-DC98-4E62-B96B-E75D19F20767 v2
Table 103. Number of ALMCALH instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ALMCALH - - 5
GUID-70B7357D-F467-4CF5-9F73-641A82D334F5 v2
Table 104. Number of WRNCALH instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
WRNCALH - - 5
GUID-EAA43288-01A5-49CF-BF5B-9ABF6DC27D85 v2
Table 105. Number of INDCALH instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCALH - 5 -
ABB 113
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-D1179280-1D99-4A66-91AC-B7343DBA9F23 v3
Table 106. Number of AND instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
AND 60 60 160
GUID-45DF373F-DC39-4E1B-B45B-6B454E8E0E50 v3
Table 107. Number of GATE instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
GATE 10 10 20
GUID-0EC4192A-EF03-47C0-AEC1-09B68B411A98 v3
Table 108. Number of INV instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INV 90 90 240
GUID-B2E6F510-8766-4381-9618-CE02ED71FFB6 v2
Table 109. Number of LLD instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
LLD 10 10 20
GUID-35A795D7-A6BD-4669-A023-43C497DBFB01 v4
Table 110. Number of OR instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
OR 100 60 160
GUID-E05E5FB1-23E7-4816-84F2-1FBFFDFF2B43 v2
Table 111. Number of PULSETIMER instances
Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

GUID-BE6FD540-E96E-4F15-B2A2-12FFAE6C51DB v2
Table 112. Number of RSMEMORY instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORY 10 10 20
GUID-7A0F4327-CA83-4FB0-AB28-7C5F17AE6354 v2
Table 113. Number of SRMEMORY instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORY 10 10 20
114 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-C6C98FE0-F559-45EE-B853-464516775417 v3
Table 114. Number of TIMERSET instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSET 15 15 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

GUID-0B07F78C-10BD-4070-AFF0-6EE36454AA03 v2
Table 115. Number of XOR instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XOR 10 10 20
GUID-23D4121A-4C9A-4072-BBE3-6DB076EDAB79 v1
Table 116. Number of ANDQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ANDQT - 20 100
GUID-27DF23C0-A0B2-4BB0-80B5-FC7B7F7FE448 v1
Table 117. Number of INDCOMBSPQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDCOMBSPQT - 10 10
GUID-C1E61AE5-22CF-4198-97CF-8C8043EE96D2 v1
Table 118. Number of INDEXTSPQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INDEXTSPQT - 10 10
GUID-77FEBE9B-0882-4E85-8B1A-7671807BFC02 v2
Table 119. Number of INVALIDQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVALIDQT 10 6 6
GUID-F25B94C6-9CC9-48A0-A7A3-47627D2B56E2 v1
Table 120. Number of INVERTERQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INVERTERQT - 20 100
GUID-88B27B3C-26D2-47AF-9878-CC19018171B1 v1
Table 121. Number of ORQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ORQT - 20 100
ABB 115
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-61263951-53A8-4113-82B5-3DB3BF0D9449 v1
Table 122. Number of PULSETIMERQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
PULSETIMERQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

GUID-94C803B4-6C5A-4072-AB5C-20DDE98C9A70 v1
Table 123. Number of RSMEMORYQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
RSMEMORYQT - 10 30
GUID-341562FB-6149-495B-8A63-200DF16A5590 v1
Table 124. Number of SRMEMORYQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SRMEMORYQT - 10 30
GUID-B6231B97-05ED-40E8-B735-1E1A50FDB85F v1
Table 125. Number of TIMERSETQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TIMERSETQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

GUID-1C381E02-6B9E-44DC-828F-8B3EA7EDAA54 v1
Table 126. Number of XORQT instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
XORQT - 10 30
116 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-19810098-1820-4765-8F0B-7D585FFC0C78 v7
Table 127. Number of instances in the extension logic package
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
SLGAPC 10 10 54
VSGAPC 10 10 100
AND 40 40 100
OR 40 40 100
PULSETIMER 20 20 49
GATE — — 49
TIMERSET 30 30 49
XOR 10 10 69
LLD — — 49
SRMEMORY 10 10 110
INV 40 40 100
RSMEMORY 10 10 20
GUID-65A2876A-F779-41C4-ACD7-7662D1E7F1F2 v3
Table 128. Number of B16I instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
B16I 6 4 8
GUID-3820F464-D296-4CAD-8491-F3F997359D79 v2
Table 129. Number of BTIGAPC instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
BTIGAPC 4 4 8
GUID-B45901F4-B163-4696-8220-7F8CAC84D793 v2
Table 130. Number of IB16 instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
IB16 6 4 8
GUID-A339BBA3-8FD0-429D-BB49-809EAC4D53B0 v2
Table 131. Number of ITBGAPC instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
ITBGAPC 4 4 8
ABB 117
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-B258726E-1129-47C9-94F9-BE634A2085FA v4
Table 132. Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC
Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy
Elapsed time integration 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is

greater
8 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is

greater
100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is

greater
Table 133. Number of TEIGAPC instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
TEIGAPC 4 4 4
GUID-CEA332FF-838D-42B7-AEFC-C1E87809825E v3
Table 134. Number of INTCOMP instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
INTCOMP 10 10 10
GUID-3FDD7677-1D86-42AD-A545-B66081C49B47 v4
Table 135. Number of REALCOMP instances
3 ms 8 ms 100 ms
REALCOMP 10 10 10
118 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Monitoring
M12386-1 v16
Table 136. Power system measurement CVMMXN
Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fr ±2.0 mHz
Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.3% of U at U≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U> 50 V
Current (0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.8% of I at 0.1 x Ir< I < 0.2 x Ir

± 0.5% of I at 0.2 x Ir< I < 0.5 x Ir
±0.2% of I at 0.5 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir
Active power, P (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr

(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of P

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ> 0.7
Reactive power, Q (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr

(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of Q

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ< 0.7
Apparent power, S (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr

(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sr
(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of S

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
Power factor, cos (φ) (10 to 300) V <0.02

(0.1-4.0) x Ir
(100 to 220) V <0.01

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
GUID-5E04B3F9-E1B7-4974-9C0B-DE9CD4A2408F v6
Table 137. Current measurement CMMXU
Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Phase angle at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir
±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 4.0 × Ir
GUID-374C2AF0-D647-4159-8D3A-71190FE3CFE0 v5
Table 138. Voltage measurement phase-phase VMMXU
Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V
ABB 119
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-ED634B6D-9918-464F-B6A4-51B78129B819 v6
Table 139. Voltage measurement phase-earth VNMMXU
Voltage (5 to 175) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

GUID-9B8A7FA5-9C98-4CBD-A162-7112869CF030 v5
Table 140. Current sequence measurement CMSQI
Current positive sequence, I1 (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir
Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 4.0 × Ir
GUID-47094054-A828-459B-BE6A-D7FA1B317DA7 v6
Table 141. Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI
Voltage positive sequence, U1 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V
Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

M16080-1 v5
Table 142. Supervision of mA input signals
mA measuring function ±5, ±10, ±20 mA ±0.1 % of set value ±0.005 mA

0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20 mA
Max current of transducer to (-20.00 to +20.00) mA

input
Min current of transducer to (-20.00 to +20.00) mA

input
Alarm level for input (-20.00 to +20.00) mA
Warning level for input (-20.00 to +20.00) mA
Alarm hysteresis for input (0.0-20.0) mA
120 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M12760-1 v11
Table 143. Disturbance report DRPRDRE
Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s -
Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -
Limit time (0.5–10.0) s -
Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -
Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 178
Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -

derived)
Maximum number of binary inputs 352 -
Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording 30 -
Maximum number of indications in a disturbance report 352 -
Maximum number of events in the Event recording per recording 150 -
Maximum number of events in the Event list 1000, first in - first out -
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number of 340 seconds (100 recordings) at -
channels, typical value) 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz
Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -

1.2 kHz at 60 Hz
Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

GUID-F034B396-6600-49EF-B0A5-8ED96766A6A0 v8
Table 144. Insulation supervision for gas medium function SSIMG
Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Reset time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
ABB 121
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-83B0F607-D898-403A-94FD-7FE8D45C73FF v8
Table 145. Insulation supervision for liquid medium function SSIML
Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value
Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value
Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
GUID-B6799420-D726-460E-B02F-C7D4F1937432 v9
Table 146. Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR
Alarm level for open and close travel time (0 – 200) ms ±3 ms
Alarm level for number of operations (0 – 9999) -
Independent time delay for spring charging (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
time alarm
Independent time delay for gas pressure alarm (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
Independent time delay for gas pressure (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
lockout
CB Contact Travel Time, opening and closing ±3 ms
Remaining Life of CB ±2 operations
Accumulated Energy ±1.0% or ±0.5 whichever is greater

M14987-1 v6
Table 147. Fault locator LMBRFLO
Function Value or range Accuracy
Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Phase selection According to input signals -
Maximum number of fault 100 -

locations
M12700-1 v4
Table 148. Event list
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing
122 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M13765-1 v5
Table 149. Indications
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single disturbance 352
Maximum number of recorded disturbances 100

M12702-1 v4
Table 150. Event recorder
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150
Maximum number of disturbance reports 100
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy Depending on time

synchronizing
M13747-1 v5
Table 151. Trip value recorder
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 30

M12384-1 v7
Table 152. Disturbance recorder
Function Value
Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 40
Maximum number of binary inputs 352
Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz
of channels, typical value) 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz
GUID-C43B8654-60FE-4E20-8328-754C238F4AD0 v3
Table 153. Event counter with limit supervision L4UFCNT
Counter value 0-65535 -
Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -

GUID-F5E124E3-0B85-41AC-9830-A2362FD289F2 v1
Table 154. Running hour-meter TEILGAPC
Time limit for alarm supervision, tAlarm (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
Time limit for warning supervision, tWarning (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
Time limit for overflow supervision Fixed to 99999.9 hours ±0.1%
ABB 123
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Metering
M13404-2 v5
Table 155. Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT
Function Setting range Accuracy
Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -
Cycle time for report of counter (1–3600) s -

value
SEMOD153707-2 v5
Table 156. Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR
Energy metering kWh Export/Import, kvarh Export/ Input from MMXU. No extra error at steady load
Import
124 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Station communication
M15031-1 v9
Table 157. Communication protocols
Function Value
Protocol IEC 61850-8-1
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX
Protocol IEC 60870–5–103
Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd
Protocol DNP3.0
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–115200 Bd
Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet
Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s
Protocol LON
Communication speed for the IEDs 1.25 Mbit/s
Protocol SPA
Communication speed for the IEDs 300–38400 Bd

GUID-E8B5405C-241C-4DC2-8AB1-3FA77343A4DE v2
Table 158. IEC 61850-9-2 communication protocol
Function Value
Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX

M11927-1 v2
Table 159. LON communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol LON
Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s

M11901-1 v2
Table 160. SPA communication protocol
Function Value
Protocol SPA
Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd
Slave number 1 to 899

M11921-1 v4
Table 161. IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Function Value
Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd
ABB 125
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M12589-1 v4
Table 162. SLM – LON port
Quantity Range or value
Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST

Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)

Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35ft typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fiber: 1 mm
*) depending on optical budget calculation

SEMOD117441-2 v5
Table 163. SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port
Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST

Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in
Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000ft m typically *)

Plastic fiber: 7 dB (25m/80ft m typically *)
Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fiber: 1 mm

SEMOD158710-2 v2
Table 164. Galvanic RS485 communication module
Communication speed 2400–19200 bauds
External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector

Soft ground 2-pole connector
SEMOD55310-2 v13
Table 165. SFP - Optical ethernet port
Quantity Rated value
Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and redundant links for
communication using any protocol
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX
Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fiber
Wave length 1310 nm, Class 1 laser safety
Optical connector Type LC
Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s
126 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 166. SFP - Galvanic RJ45
Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and redundant links for
communication using any protocol
Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX
Type of cable Cat5e FTP
Connector Type RJ45
Communication Speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

GUID-8651FF22-C007-4D53-B7E3-686A30F37CB6 v6
Table 167. Ethernet redundancy protocols, IEC 62439-3
Function Value
Protocol IEC 62439-3 Ed.1 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP-0)
Communication speed 100Base-FX
Protocol IEC 62439-3 Ed.2 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP-1)
Protocol IEC 62439-3 Ed.2 High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)
Connectors Optical, type LC
ABB 127
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
M12756-1 v11
Remote communication
Table 168. Line data communication module
Characteristic Range or value
Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)
Type of fiber Multi-mode fiber Single-mode fiber Single-mode fiber

glass 62.5/125 µm glass 9/125 µm glass 9/125 µm
Multi-mode fiber
glass 50/125 µm
Peak Emission Wave length

Nominal 820 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
Maximum 865 nm 1330 nm 1580 nm
Minimum 792 nm 1290 nm 1520 nm
Optical budget 18.8 dB (typical 26.8 dB (typical 28.7 dB (typical

Multi-mode fiber glass 62.5/125 mm distance about 3 distance 80 km/50 distance 120 km/68
km/2 mile *) mile *) mile *)
Multi-mode fiber glass 50/125 mm 11.5 dB (typical

distance about 2
km/1 mile *)
Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC
Protocol C37.94 C37.94 C37.94

implementation **) implementation **)
Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous
Transmission rate / Data rate 2 Mbit/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mbit/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mbit/s / 64 kbit/s
Clock source Internal or derived Internal or derived Internal or derived

from received signal from received signal from received signal

**) C37.94 originally defined just for multi-mode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94
128 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Hardware
IED
M11778-1 v7 SEMOD53385-1 v1
Table 169. Case
Material Steel sheet
Front plate Stainless steel with cut-out for HMI
Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel
Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)

M12327-1 v5
Table 170. Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)
Sides, top and bottom IP40
Rear side IP20 with screw compression type

IP10 with ring lug terminals
M11777-1 v7
Table 171. Weight
Case size Weight
6U, 1/2 x 19” £ 7.5 kg/16 lb
6U, 3/4 x 19” £ 15 kg/33 lb
6U, 1/1 x 19” £ 15 kg/33 lb
Electrical safety
GUID-1CF5B10A-CF8B-407D-8D87-F4B48B43C2B2 v2 GUID-2825B541-DD31-4DAF-B5B3-97555F81A1C2 v1
Table 172. Electrical safety according to IEC 60255-27
Equipment class I (protective earthed)
Overvoltage category III
Pollution degree 2 (normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by
condensation is to be expected)
Connection system
SEMOD53376-2 v6 SEMOD53371-1 v1
Table 173. CT and VT circuit connectors
Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)

2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
M12583-1 v7
Table 174. Auxiliary power supply and binary I/O connectors
Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area
Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)

2 × 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)
Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)
Because of limitations of space, when ring

lug terminal is ordered for Binary I/O
ABB 129
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-96676D5D-0835-44DA-BC22-058FD18BDF34 v3
connections, one blank slot is necessary
between two adjacent IO modules. Please
refer to the ordering particulars for details.
Table 175. NUM: Communication ports
NUM 4 Ethernet ports

1 Basic, 3 Optional
Ethernet connection type SFP Optical LC or Galvanic RJ45
Carrier modules supported OEM, LDCM

GUID-4876834C-CABB-400B-B84B-215F65D8AF92 v3
Table 176. OEM: Number of Ethernet ports
OEM 2 Ethernet Ports
Ethernet connection type SFP Optical LC or Galvanic RJ45
130 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Basic IED functions

M11963-1 v5
Table 177. Self supervision with internal event list
Data Value
Recording manner Continuous, event controlled
List size 40 events, first in-first out

M12331-1 v9
Table 178. Time synchronization, time tagging
Function Value
Time tagging accuracy of the synchrophasor data ± 1 µs
Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms
Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), events and sampled ± 1.0 ms typically
measurement values
Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement values ± 1.0 ms typically
GUID-8AEB81D0-1731-46DF-A206-D2E758823575 v2
Table 179. Time synchronization PTP: IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Supported types of clock Boundary Clock (BC), Ordinary Clock (OC), Transparent Clock (TC)
Accuracy According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Number of nodes According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3
Ports supported All rear Ethernet ports

SEMOD55660-2 v3
Table 180. GPS time synchronization module (GTM)
Receiver – ±1µs relative UTC
Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new <30 minutes –

position or after power loss longer than 1 month
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss <15 minutes –

longer than 48 hours
Time to reliable time reference after a power loss <5 minutes –

shorter than 48 hours
SEMOD55693-2 v5
Table 181. GPS – Antenna and cable
Function Value
Max antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz
Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm
Lightning protection Must be provided externally
Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end

TNC in antenna end
Accuracy +/-1μs
ABB 131
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
SEMOD141136-2 v9
Table 182. IRIG-B
Number of channels IRIG-B 1
Number of optical channels 1
Electrical connector:
Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC
Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp
Amplitude modulated
– low level 1-3 Vpp
– high level 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x
Accuracy +/-10μs for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100μs for IRIG-B 12x
Input impedance 100 k ohm
Optical connector:
Optical connector IRIG-B Type ST
Type of fiber 62.5/125 μm multimode fiber
Supported formats IRIG-B 00x
Accuracy +/- 1μs
132 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Inverse characteristic
M12388-1 v23
Table 183. ANSI Inverse time characteristics
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±2.0% or ±40 ms
æ A ö whichever is greater
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US
Reset characteristic:
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1)
I = Imeasured/Iset
ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1
ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6
ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46
ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85
ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30
ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46
ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6
Table 184. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection

±5.0% or ±40 ms
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1)
I = Imeasured/Iset
ABB 133
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 185. IEC Inverse time characteristics
Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN-US CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
Reset characteristic: PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
The parameter setting Characteristn = used, since this parameter setting is for
Reserved (where, n = 1 - 4) shall not be future use and not implemented yet.
134 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 186. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection

or ±40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 187. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics
RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%

1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
ABB 135
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 188. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection

1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
GUID-771E5218-2913-4BB0-B1EE-2CA1E912AEAA v1
Table 189. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential Protection
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,

± 5.0% or ± 40 ms
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset
136 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 190. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 5.0%

or ± 40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
The parameter setting Characterist1 and 4/ parameter setting is for future use and not
Reserved shall not be used, since this implemented yet.
ABB 137
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 191. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection
RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 5.0%

or ± 40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
RD type logarithmic inverse characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
GUID-19F8E187-4ED0-48C3-92F6-0D9EAA2B39BB v4
Table 192. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±5.0% or ±160 ms
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
I = Imeasured/Iset
138 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 193. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01

B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 194. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
I = Imeasured/Iset
æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
ABB 139
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
GUID-2AE8C92E-5DA8-487F-927D-8E553EE29240 v2
Table 195. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection

± 5.0% or ±40 ms
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1)
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 196. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection

æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
I = Imeasured/Iset
140 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
SEMOD116978-2 v10
Table 197. Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms

k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  
IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN-US
Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U> ø
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN-US
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
k×A B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
t = +D C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
P
æB × U -U > ö D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001
ç -C÷
è U > ø P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ABB 141
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 198. Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms

k
t =
æ U < -U
ö
ç ÷
è U< ø
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01
k × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ 32 × U < -U - 0.5 ö
ç ÷
è U < ø
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
é ù B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
ê k×A
ú C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
t =ê ú+D D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001
ê æ U < -U ö
P
ú P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè U < ø û
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
142 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 199. Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of ±5.0% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

0.01
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of

0.01
k×A A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
æB × U - U > ö B = (0.50-100.00) in steps
ç -C÷
è U > ø of 0.01
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in steps
of 0.001
ABB 143
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
25. Ordering for customized IED

GUID-79B6B8D2-5EE1-4456-A767-5820B9FA61D7 v9
Table 200. General guidelines
Guidelines
Carefully read and follow the set of rules to ensure problem-free order management.
Please refer to the available functions table for included application functions.
PCM600 can be used to make changes and/or additions to the delivered factory configuration of the pre-configured.
Table 201. Example ordering code
To obtain the complete ordering code, please combine code from the selection tables, as given in the example below.
The selected qty of each table must be filled in, if no selection is possible the code is 0
Example of a complete code: RED670*2.2 - F00X00 - A000003021000010 - B52252552212521111111110000 - C3300132122020022221000300 - D22212011 -
E66600 - F4 - S6 - G232 - H20401000000 - K20201111 - L1100 - M0010 - P11100000000000000 - B1X0 - AC -CA - B - A3X0 - CD1D1ARGN1N1XXXXXXX -
KKKXXHKKLAGXSY
Product definition - Differential protection -

RED670* 2.2 - F00 X00 - A 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
Impedance protection -
B 0 0 0 0 -
Current protection -
C 00 0 00 1 0 0 0 0 0 -
Voltage protection - Frequency protection - Multipurpose - General -

protection calculation
D 0 1 - E 00 - F - S -
Secondary system supervision - Control -

G - H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
Scheme communication - Logic - Monitoring - Station communication -

K - L 00 - M 1 0 - P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
Language - Casing and - Power - HMI - Analog input - Binary input/output -

mounting supply
B1 - - - - - -
Station communication, remote end serial communication and time synchronization

K
Table 202. Product definition
RED670* 2.2 F00 X00
Table 203. Product definition ordering codes
Product RED670*
Software version 2.2
Configuration alternative
Line differential protection RED670 F00
ACT configuration
No ACT configuration downloaded X00
Table 204. Differential protection
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A 0 0 0 0 0 0
144 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 205. Differential functions
Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules

identification qty qty
High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF 1MRK005904-HB 6 0-3
Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF 1MRK005904-LC 8 0-2
Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends L3CPDIF 1MRK005904-MC 9 0-1 Only one PDIF must
be ordered.
Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line ends L6CPDIF 1MRK005904-NC 10 0-1
L4CPDIF requires
Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends, inzone LT3CPDIF 1MRK005904-PC 11 0-1 line data
transformer communication in
Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line ends, inzone LT6CPDIF 1MRK005904-RC 12 0-1 2Mbps mode.
transformer
High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line ends L4CPDIF 1MRK005905-NA 13 0-1
Line differential protection logic LDLPSCH 1MRK005904-SA 14 0-1 Required with
L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF,
LT3CPDIF or
LT6CPDIF
Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC 1MRK005904-TA 15 0-1
Table 206. Impedance protection
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
B 0 0 0 0
ABB 145
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 207. Impedance functions, alternatives

Note: One and only one alternative can be selected. Selected qty is 0 for other functions in an unselected alternative.
Alternative 1 Distance protection, quadrilateral
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS, 1MRK005907-AA 1 0-5
ZMQAPDIS
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 1MRK005907-BA 2 0-2
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS 1MRK005907-CA 3 0-2
Alternative 2 Distance protection for series compensated lines, quadrilateral
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series ZMCPDIS, 1MRK005907-DA 4 0-5
compensated lines ZMCAPDIS
Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series ZDSRDIR 1MRK005907-EA 5 0-2
compensation
Alternative 3 Distance protection, mho (mho for phase - phase fault and mho in parallel with quad for earth fault)
Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic ZMHPDIS 1MRK005907-FA 6 0-5
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS, 1MRK005907-GA 7 0-5
ZMMAPDIS
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR 1MRK005907-HA 8 0-2
Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults ZDARDIR 1MRK005907-KA 9 0-2
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC 1MRK005907-LB 10 0-1
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS 1MRK005907-MA 11 0-2
Alternative 4 Distance protection, quadrilateral with separate settings for PP and PE
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 1MRK005907-BA 2 0-2
Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic separate Ph-Ph ZMRPDIS, 1MRK005907-NA 12 0-5
and Ph-E settings ZMRAPDIS
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS 1MRK005907-PA 13 0-2
Alternative 5 High speed distance protection, quadrilateral and mho
High speed distance protection, quad and mho characteristic ZMFPDIS 1MRK005907-SD 14 0-1
Alternative 6 High speed distance protection for series compensated lines, quadrilateral and mho
High speed distance protection for series compensated lines, ZMFCPDIS 1MRK005907-RD 15 0-1
quadrilateral and mho characteristic
Optional for alternative 1
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR 1MRK005907-HA 8 0-2
Optional for alternative 3
Optional for alternatives 1, 2 and 4
Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults ZDARDIR 1MRK005907-KA 9 0-2
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS 1MRK005907-MA 11 0-2
Optional for alternatives 1, 2, 3 and 4
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ 1MRK005908-DB 16 0-1
Optional for alternatives 5 and 6
Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ 1MRK005908-DC 17 0-1
Optional with any alternatives
Power swing detection ZMRPSB 1MRK005907-UA 18 0-1
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based ZCVPSOF 1MRK005908-AA 19 0-1
Power swing logic PSLPSCH 1MRK005907-VA 20 0-1
PoleSlip/Out-of-step protection PSPPPAM 1MRK005908-CB 21 0-1
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM 1MRK005908-GA 22 0-1
Table 208. Current protection
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
C 00 0 00 1 0 0 0 0 0
146 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 209. Current functions

Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC 1MRK005910-AD 1 0-3
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC 1MRK005910-BC 2 0-3
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC 1MRK005910-DD 4 0-1
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC 1MRK005910-EE 5 0-3
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent NS4PTOC 1MRK005910-FB 6 0-2
protection
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE 1MRK005910-GA 7 0-1
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius LCPTTR 1MRK005911-BA 8 0-2
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Fahrenheit LFPTTR 1MRK005911-AA 9 0-2
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF 1MRK005910-LA 11 0-2
Stub protection STBPTOC 1MRK005910-NC 13 0-2
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 1MRK005910-PA 14 0-2
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 1MRK005910-RA 15 0-2
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 1MRK005910-TA 16 0-2
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC 1MRK005910-SA 17 1
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection VRPVOC 1MRK005910-XA 21 0-3
Table 210. Voltage protection
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D 0 1
Table 211. Voltage functions

Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 1MRK005912-AA 1 0-2
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 1MRK005912-BA 2 0-2
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV 1MRK005912-CC 3 0-2
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH 1MRK005912-DA 4 0-1
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV 1MRK005912-EA 5 0-2
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV 1MRK005912-GA 7 1
Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC 1MRK005912-HA 8 0-1
Table 212. Frequency protection
Position 1 2 3 4
E 00
Table 213. Frequency functions

Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 1MRK005914-AC 1 0-6
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 1MRK005914-BB 2 0-6
Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC 1MRK005914-CB 3 0-6
Table 214. Multipurpose protection
Position 1
F
Table 215. Multipurpose functions

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 1MRK005915-AA 1 0-4
ABB 147
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 216. General calculation
Position 1
S
Table 217. General calculation functions

Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC 1MRK005915-KB 1 0-6
Table 218. Secondary system supervision
Position 1 2 3
G
Table 219. Secondary system supervision functions

Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC 1MRK005916-AC 1 0-2
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC 1MRK005916-BA 2 0-3
Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference VDSPVC 1MRK005916-CA 3 0-2
Table 220. Control
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 221. Control functions

Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing SESRSYN 1MRK005917-AC 1 0-2
Autorecloser SMBRREC 1MRK005917-BC 3 0-4
Control functionality for a single bay, max 10 objects (1CB), APC10 1MRK005917-AZ 5 0-1 Only one APC type
including interlocking can be ordered.
Control functionality for a single bay, max 15 objects (2CB), APC15 1MRK005917-BZ 6 0-1
including interlocking
Table 222. Scheme communication
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K
Table 223. Scheme communication functions

Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking scheme ZCPSCH 1MRK005920-AA 1 0-2 Only one of
signal transmit ZCPSCH/
ZC1PPSCH can be
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance ZC1PPSCH 1MRK005920-BA 2 0-2
selected.
protection
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection ZCRWPSCH 1MRK005920-CA 3 0-2 Only one of
ZCRWPSCH/
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated ZC1WPSCH 1MRK005920-DA 4 0-2
ZC1WPSCH can be
communication
selected.
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH 1MRK005920-EA 5 0-1
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH 1MRK005920-FA 6 0-1
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual ECRWPSCH 1MRK005920-GA 7 0-1
overcurrent protection
Direct transfer trip DTT 1MRK005921-AX 8 0-1
Table 224. Logic
Position 1 2 3
L 00
148 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 225. Logic functions

Configurable logic blocks Q/T 1MRK005922-MX 1 0-1
Extension logic package 1MRK005922-AZ 2 0-1
Table 226. Monitoring
Position 1 2 3
M 1 0
Table 227. Monitoring functions

Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR 1MRK005924-HA 1 00-06
Fault locator LMBRFLO 1MRK005925-XB 2 1
Table 228. Station communication
Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table 229. Station communication functions

IEC61850-9-2 Process bus communication, 8 merging units 1MRK005933-HA 1 0-1
IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol PRP 1MRK005932-FA 2 0-1 PRP and HSR
require two SFPs
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy HSR 1MRK005932-NA 3 0-1
placed in pairs.
Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors 1MRK005933-DA 15 0-1
Table 230. Language selection
Language Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

First local HMI user dialogue language
HMI language, English IEC 1MRK002930-AA B1
Additional local HMI user dialogue language
No additional HMI language X0
HMI language, English US 1MRK002920-UB A12
Selected B1
Table 231. Casing selection
Casing Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

1/2 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VA A
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VB B
3/4 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VE C
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VC D
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VD E
Selected
ABB 149
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 232. Mounting selection
Mounting details with IP40 of protection from the front Ordering no Selection Notes and rules
No mounting kit included X
19" rack mounting kit for 1/2 x 19" case or 2xRHGS6 or RHGS12 1MRK002420-BB A
19" rack mounting kit for 3/4 x 19" case or 3xRHGS6 1MRK002420-BA B
19" rack mounting kit for 1/1 x 19" case 1MRK002420-CA C
Wall mounting kit 1MRK002420-DA D Wall mounting not recommended
with communication modules with
fiber connection
Flush mounting kit 1MRK002420-PA E
Flush mounting kit + IP54 mounting seal 1MRK002420-NA F
Selected
Table 233. Power supply module selection
Power supply module Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

Compression terminals 1MRK002960-GA C
Ringlug terminals 1MRK002960-HA R
Power supply module 24-60 VDC 1MRK002239-AB A
Power supply module 90-250 VDC 1MRK002239-BB B
Selected
Table 234. Human machine interface selection
Human machine hardware interface Case size Ordering no Selection Notes and rules
Medium size - graphic display, IEC keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", IEC 1MRK000028-AA B
3/4 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-CA
1/1 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-BA
Medium size - graphic display, ANSI keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", ANSI 1MRK000028-AB C
3/4 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-CB
1/1 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-BB
Selected
150 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 235. Analog system selection
Analog system Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

When more than one TRM is selected, the connector type on both TRMs must be the same (A compression or B ring lug).
Slot position (front view/rear view)
P40/X401
P41/X411
No Transformer input module included X0 X0 Only valid if IEC 61850-9-2
Process bus communication is
selected.
TRM 12I 1A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-CG A1 A1
TRM 12I 5A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-CH A2 A2
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BG A3 A3
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BH A4 A4
First TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-BK A5 A5
First TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AG A6 A6
First TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AH A7 A7
First TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-DG A8 A8 Maximum qty = 1
First TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-DH A9 A9 Maximum qty = 1
First TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AP A12 A12
First TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AR A13 A13
First TRM 6I 5A + 1I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AU A14 A14
First TRM 3I 5A + 4I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AV A15 A15
First TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AE A16 A16
First TRM 3IM 1A + 4IP 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-EA A17 A17
First TRM 3IM 5A + 4IP 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-EB A18 A18
TRM 12I 1A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-CC B1 B1
TRM 12I 5A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-CD B2 B2
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BC B3 B3
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BD B4 B4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BF B5 B5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AC B6 B6
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AD B7 B7
TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DC B8 B8 Maximum qty = 1
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DD B9 B9 Maximum qty = 1
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AS B12 B12
TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AT B13 B13
TRM 6I 5A + 1I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AX B14 B14
TRM 3I 5A + 4I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AY B15 B15
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AF B16 B16
TRM 3IM 1A + 4IP 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-EC B17 B17
TRM 3IM 5A + 4IP 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-ED B18 B18
Selected
ABB 151
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 236. Maximum quantity of I/O modules, with compression terminals
When ordering I/O modules, observe the maximum quantities according to the tables below.
Note: Standard order of location for I/O modules is BIM-BOM-SOM-IOM-MIM from left to right as seen from the rear side of the IED, but
can also be freely placed.
Note: The maximum quantity of I/O modules depends on the type of connection terminals.
Case sizes BIM IOM BOM/ MIM Maximum in case
SOM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 14 6 4 4 14 *)
one (1) TRM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 11 6 4 4 11 *)
two (2) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 8 6 4 4 8 *)
one (1) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 5 5 4 4 5 *)
two (2) TRM
1/2 x 19” rack casing, 3 3 3 1 3
one (1) TRM
*) including a combination of maximum four modules of type BOM, SOM and MIM
Table 237. Maximum quantity of I/O modules, with ringlug terminals
Note: Only every second slot can be used.

Case sizes BIM IOM BOM/ MIM Maximum in case
SOM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 7 6 4 4 7 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9, P11, P13, P15
one (1) TRM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 5 5 4 4 5 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9, P11
two (2) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 4 4 4 4 4 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9
one (1) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 2 2 2 2 2, possible locations: P3, P5
two (2) TRM
1/2 x 19” rack casing, 1 1 1 1 1, possible location: P3
one (1) TRM
**) including a combination of maximum four modules of type BOM, SOM and MIM
152 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 238. Binary input/output module selection
Binary input/ Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

output modules
Slot position
P3/X31
P4/X41
P5/X51
P6/X61
P7/X71
P8/X81
P9/X91
P10/X101
P11/X111
P12/X121
P13/X131
P14/X141
P15/X151
P16/X161
(front view/rear
view)
1/2 case with 1 █ █ █ These black marks

TRM indicate the maximum
number of modules per
3/4 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
casing type and the
TRM
slots that can be
3/4 case with 2 █ █ █ █ █ occupied.
TRM
1/1 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
1/1 case with 2 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
Compression 1MRK002960-KA C
terminals
Ringlug terminals 1MRK002960-LA R Only every second slot
can be used; see Table
237
No board in slot X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Binary output 1MRK000614-AB A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
module 24 output
relays (BOM)
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-DD B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-AD C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-BD D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CD E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CE E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2
RL220,
220-250VDC,
120mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-HA F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-EA G G G G G G G G G G G G G G
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-FA H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-GA K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-GD L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1
10+2 outputs,
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-AE M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1
10+2 outputs,
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA
ABB 153
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 238. Binary input/output module selection, continued

Binary input/ Ordering no Selection Notes and rules
output modules
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-BE N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1
10+2 outputs,
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-CE P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
10+2 outputs,
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs 1MRK000173-CF P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
10+2 outputs,
RL220,
220-250VDC,
110mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-GC U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL24,
24-30VDC, 50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-AD V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL48,
48-60VDC, 50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-BD W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-CD Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
mA input module 1MRK000284-AB R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
MIM 6 channels
SOM Static 1MRK002614-BA T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 SOM must not be
output module, placed in the following
12 outputs; 6 positions: 1/2 case slot
standard relays P5, 3/4 case 1 TRM slot
+ 6 static outputs, P10, 3/4 case 2 TRM
48-60VDC slot P7, 1/1 case 2 TRM
slot P13.
SOM Static 1MRK002614-CA T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2
output module,
12 outputs; 6
standard relays
+ 6 static outputs,
110-250VDC
Selected
154 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Table 239. Station communication, remote end serial communication and time synchronization selection
Station communication, remote end Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

serial communication and time
synchronization
Slot position (front view/rear view) The maximum number
P30:1/X301
P30:2/X302
P30:3/X303
P30:4/X304
P30:5/X305
P30:6/X306
P30:6:1/X3061
P30:6:2/X3062
P31:1/X311
P31:2/X312
P31:3/X313
P32:2/X322
P32:3/X323
LDCM mode
and type of LDCM
modules supported
depend on the total
amount of I/O and
communication modules
in the IED.
Available slots in 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ Max 2 LDCM in 1/2 case
case with 1 TRM
Available slots in 3/4 and 1/1 case █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
with 2 TRM
No communication board included X X X X X X X X X X X X
Ethernet SFP, optical LC connector 1MRK005500-AA K K K K K K Ethernet SFP is basic in
P30:1. P30:6:1 and
Ethernet SFP, RJ45 connector 1MRK005500-BA P P P P P P
P30:6:2 require the
Optical Ethernet module
in P30:6.
Optical Ethernet module 1MRK002266-EA H
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-AB L
60870-5-103 plastic interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-BB M
60870-5-103 plastic/glass interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-CB N
60870-5-103 glass interface
Galvanic RS485 communication 1MRK002309-AA G G G
module
Optical short range LDCM 1MRK002122-AB A A A A A A Max 4 LDCMs can be
ordered. Always place
Optical medium range LDCM, 1310 1MRK002311-AA B B B B B B
LDCM modules on the
nm
same board to support
Optical long range LDCM, 1550 nm 1MRK002311-BA C C C C C C redundant
communication: in P30:5
and P30:6, P31:2 and
P31:3 or P32:2 and
P32:3.
Line data communication, default — X
64kbps mode
Allow line data communication in 1MRK007002-AA Y
2Mbps mode
GPS time module 1MRK002282-AB S S S S
IRIG-B time synchronization module 1MRK002305-AA F F F F
Selected
ABB 155
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
26. Ordering for pre-configured IED

GUID-0B941090-4C75-45EE-A406-B7A938251673 v14
Guidelines
Carefully read and follow the set of rules to ensure problem-free order management.
Please refer to the available functions table for included application functions.
PCM600 can be used to make changes and/or additions to the delivered factory configuration of the pre-configured.
To obtain the complete ordering code, please combine code from the tables, as given in the example below.
Example code: RED670 *2.2-B33X00- A02A04B15C34H05H38-B1X0-AC-CA-B-A6X0-CB1AB1RGN1N1XXXXXXX-KKKXXHKKLAGXSY. Using the code of each
position #1-11 specified as RED670*1-2 2-3 3 3 3 3 3-4 4-5 6-7 7-8-9 9 9-10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10-11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
# 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 6 - 7 - 8 - 9 -
RED670* 2.2 - - - - - - - -
10 - 11
-
Position
SOFTWARE #1 Notes and rules
Version number
Version no. 2.2
Selection for position #1
Configuration alternatives Ordering no #2 Notes and rules

Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-5 line ends 1MRK004002-FG B33
Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends 1MRK004002-GG A42
Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends 1MRK004002-HG B42
Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, with distance protection 1MRK004002-KG C42
ACT configuration
ABB standard configuration X00
Selection for
position #2
156 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Software options Ordering no #3 Notes and rules

No option X00 All fields in the ordering form do
not need to be filled in.
High impedance differential protection - 3 blocks 1MRK004001-AB A02
Line differential protection 6 CT sets 1MRK004001-AD A04 Only one Line differential
protection has to be selected.
Line differential protection 6 CT sets + transformer 1MRK004001-AF A06
A04, A06 and A34 only for B33
Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends 1MRK004001-AU A34
Phase segregated scheme communication 1MRK004001-BE B05
High speed distance protection, quad and mho characteristic 1MRK004001-VF B15 Only for B33/A42/B42
Out-of-step protection 1MRK004001-BW B22 Only for B33/A42/ B42
Pole slip protection 1MRK004001-VU B24 Only for C42
Stub protection 1MRK004001-VK B27 Only for B33/B42; 1 block
included as basic
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection 1MRK004001-CT C16
Residual overcurrent protection 1MRK004001-VN C34 Only for B33/A42/B42
Directional power and voltage restrained overcurrent protection 1MRK004001-VL C35
Overexcitation protection - 2 winding 1MRK004001-DC D03
Frequency protection - line 1MRK004001-ED E04 1 block already included
General current and voltage protection 1MRK004001-FA F01
Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference 1MRK004001-HC G03
Autorecloser, 1 circuit breaker 1MRK004001-GD H04 Only for A42/C42, 1 block already
included
Autorecloser, 2 circuit breakers 1MRK004001-GE H05 Only for B33/B42, 2 blocks
already included
Control functionality for up to 10 objects 1MRK004001-GW H37 H37 only for A42/C42, H38 only
for B33/B42
Control functionality for up to 15 objects 1MRK004001-GY H38
IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol 1MRK004001-PP P23 Options P23 and P24 require two
SFPs placed in pairs.
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy 1MRK004001-PR P24
IEC 61850-9-2 Process Bus communication, 8 merging units 1MRK004001-PT P30
Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors 1MRK004001-PV P32
Selection for
position #3
Language Ordering no #4 Notes and rules

First local HMI user dialogue language
HMI language, English IEC 1MRK002930-AA B1
Additional local HMI user dialogue language
No additional HMI language X0
HMI language, English US 1MRK002920-UB A12
Selection for B1
position #4
Casing Ordering no #5 Notes and rules

1/2 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VA A
3/4 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VB B
3/4 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VE C
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VC D
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VD E
Selection for
position #5
ABB 157
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Mounting details with IP40 of protection from the front Ordering no #6 Notes and rules
No mounting kit included X
19" rack mounting kit for 1/2 x 19" case or 2xRHGS6 or RHGS12 1MRK002420-BB A
19" rack mounting kit for 3/4 x 19" case or 3xRHGS6 1MRK002420-BA B
19" rack mounting kit for 1/1 x 19" case 1MRK002420-CA C
Wall mounting kit 1MRK002420-DA D Wall mounting not recommended
with communication modules with
fiber connection
Flush mounting kit 1MRK002420-PA E
Flush mounting kit + IP54 mounting seal 1MRK002420-NA F
Selection for
position #6
Power supply modules Ordering no #7 Notes and rules

Compression terminals 1MRK002960-GA C
Ringlug terminals 1MRK002960-HA R
Power supply module, 24-60 VDC 1MRK002239-AB A
Power supply module, 90-250 VDC 1MRK002239-BB B
Selection for
position #7
Human machine hardware interface Case size Ordering no #8 Notes and rules
Medium size - graphic display, IEC keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", IEC 1MRK000028-AA B
3/4 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-CA
1/1 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-BA
Medium size - graphic display, ANSI keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", ANSI 1MRK000028-AB C
3/4 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-CB
1/1 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-BB
Selection for
position #8
158 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Analog system Ordering no #9 Notes and rules

When more than one TRM is selected, the connector type on both TRMs must be the same (A compression or B ring lug).
Slot position (front view/rear view)
P40/X401
P41/X411
No Transformer input module included X0 X0 Only valid if IEC 61850-9-2
Process bus communication is
selected.
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BG A3
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BH A4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BK A5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AG A6 A6 Second TRM is optional.
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AH A7 A7
TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-DG A8
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-DH A9
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AP A12
TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AR A13
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AE A16 A16 Only for A42/C42. Second TRM
is optional.
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BC B3
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BD B4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BF B5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AC B6 B6 Second TRM is optional.
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AD B7 B7
TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DC B8
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DD B9
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AS B12
TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AT B13
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AF B16 B16 Only for A42/C42. Second TRM
is optional.
Selection for
position #9
ABB 159
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Binary input/ Ordering no #10 Notes and rules

output modules
For pulse counting, for example kWh metering, the BIM with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be used.
Note: 1 BIM required in position P3 and 1 BOM required in position P4.
Slot position
P3/X31
P4/X41
P5/X51
P6/X61
P7/X71
P8/X81
P9/X91
P10/X101
P11/X111
P12/X121
P13/X131
P14/X141
P15/X151
P16/X161
(front view/rear
view)
1/2 case with 1 █ █ █ These black marks

TRM indicate the maximum
number of modules per
3/4 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
casing type and the
TRM
slots that can be
3/4 case with 2 █ █ █ █ █ occupied.
TRM
1/1 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
1/1 case with 2 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
Compression 1MRK002960-KA C
terminals
No board in slot X X X X X X X X X X X X
Binary output 1MRK000614-AB A A A A A A A A A A A A A Maximum 4 (BOM+SOM
module 24 output +MIM) boards.
relays (BOM)
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-DD B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
RL24, 24-30VDC,
5mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-AD C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-BD D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CD E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CE E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2
RL220,
220-250VDC,
120mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-HA F F F F F F F F F F F F
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-EA G G G G G G G G G G G G
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-FA H H H H H H H H H H H H
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-GA K K K K K K K K K K K K
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-GD L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1
10+2 outputs,
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-AE M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1
10+2 outputs,
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-BE N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1
10+2 outputs,
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
160 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Binary input/ Ordering no #10 Notes and rules

output modules
For pulse counting, for example kWh metering, the BIM with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be used.
Note: 1 BIM required in position P3 and 1 BOM required in position P4.
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-CE P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
10+2 outputs,
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs 1MRK000173-CF P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
10+2 outputs,
RL220,
220-250VDC,
110mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-GC U U U U U U U U U U U U
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL24,
24-30VDC, 50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-AD V V V V V V V V V V V V
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL48,
48-60VDC, 50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-BD W W W W W W W W W W W W
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-CD Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
mA input module 1MRK000284-AB R R R R R R R R R R R R maximum 1 MIM board
MIM 6 channels in 1/2 case
SOM Static 1MRK002614-BA T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 SOM must not to be
output module, placed in position
12 outputs; 6 nearest to NUM: 1/2
standard relays case slot P5, 3/4 case 1
+ 6 static outputs, TRM slot P10, 3/4 case
48-60VDC 2 TRM slot P7, 1/1 case
2 TRM slot P13.
SOM Static 1MRK002614-CA T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2
output module,
12 outputs; 6
standard relays
+ 6 static outputs,
110-250VDC
Selection for C
position #10
ABB 161
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Station communication, remote end serial Ordering no #11 Notes and rules
communication and time synchronization
Slot position (front view/rear view) The maximum number
P30:1/X301
P30:2/X302
P30:3/X303
P30:4/X304
P30:5/X305
P30:6/X306
P30:6:1/X3061
P30:6:2/X3062
P31:1/X311
P31:2/X312
P31:3/X313
P32:2/X322
P32:3/X323
LDCM mode
and type of LDCM
modules supported
depend on the total
amount of I/O and
communication modules
in the IED.
Available slots in 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ Max 2 LDCM in 1/2 case
TRM
Available slots in 3/4 and 1/1 case with 2 TRM █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
No communication board included X X X X X X X X X X X
Ethernet SFP, optical LC connector 1MRK005500-AA K K K K K K Ethernet SFP is basic in
P30:1. P30:6:1 and
Ethernet SFP, RJ45 connector 1MRK005500-BA P P P P P P
P30:6:2 require the
Optical Ethernet module
in P30:6.
Optical Ethernet module 1MRK002266-EA H When OEM is ordered in
combination with 2 or 4
LDCMs in redundant
mode, it is required to
order RED as a
customized product.
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 60870-5-103 plastic 1MRK001608-AB L
interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 60870-5-103 plastic/ 1MRK001608-BB M
glass interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 60870-5-103 glass 1MRK001608-CB N
interface
Galvanic RS485 communication module 1MRK002309-AA G G G
Optical short range LDCM 1MRK002122-AB A A A A A A For RED670 A42, B42
and C42, one LDCM is
Optical medium range, LDCM 1310 nm 1MRK002311-AA B B B B B B
required in P30:5.
Optical long range, LDCM 1550 nm C C C C C C For RED670 B33, two
LDCMs are required in
P30:5 and P31:2.
Max 4 LDCMs can be
ordered. Always place
LDCM modules on the
same board to support
redundant
communication: P30:5,
P30:6, P31:2, P31:3 or
P32:2 and P32:3.
Line data communication, default 64kbps mode — X For A42/B42/D42, only
2Mbps is allowed. For
Allow line data communication in 2Mbps mode 1MRK007002-AA Y
B33, select either
64kbps or 2Mbps;
default is 64kbps.
GPS time module 1MRK002282-AB S S S S
IRIG-B time synchronization module 1MRK002305-AA F F F F
Selection for
position #11
162 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
27. Ordering for Accessories
Accessories
IP15151-1 v1
GPS antenna and mounting details
M12374-3 v5
GPS antenna, including mounting kits Quantity: 1MRK 001 640-AA
Cable for antenna, 20 m (Appx. 65 ft) Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-AA
Cable for antenna, 40 m (Appx. 131 ft) Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-BA
Interface converter (for remote end data communication)

M16668-3 v9
External interface converter from C37.94 (64kbps) to G703 Quantity: 1 2 3 4

1MRK 002 245-AA
External interface converter from C37.94 (64kbps/2Mbps) to G703.E1 Quantity: 1 2 3 4

1MRK 002 245-BA
Test switch Multi-breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with internal neutral

SEMOD111888-5 v12
The test system COMBITEST intended for use with the IEDs on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-BE).
is described in 1MRK 512 001-BEN and 1MRK 001024-CA.
Please refer to the website: www.abb.com/protection-control Multi-breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with external neutral
for detailed information. on current circuit (ordering number RK926 315-BV).
Due to the high flexibility of our product and the wide variety The normally open "In test mode" contact 29-30 on the RTXP
of applications possible the test switches needs to be test switches should be connected to the input of the test
selected for each specific application. function block to allow activation of functions individually
during testing.
Select your suitable test switch base on the available
contacts arrangements shown in the reference Test switches type RTXP 24 is ordered separately. Please
documentation. refer to Section Related documents for references to
corresponding documents.
However our proposals for suitable variants are;
RHGS 6 Case or RHGS 12 Case with mounted RTXP 24 and
Single breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with internal neutral the on/off switch for dc-supply are ordered separately. Please
on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-AK). refer to Section Related documents for references to
corresponding documents.
Single breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with external neutral
on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-AC).
Protection cover
M15040-3 v6
Protective cover for rear side of RHGS6, 6U, 1/4 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-AE
Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 1/2 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-TA
Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 3/4 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-SA
Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 1/1 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-RA
ABB 163
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
External resistor unit

SEMOD120228-4 v8
High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor 20-100V, 1ph Quantity: 1 2 3
RK 795 101-MA
High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor 20-100V, 3ph Quantity: RK 795 101-MB
High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor 100-400V, 1ph Quantity: 1 2 3
RK 795 101-CB
High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor 100-400V, 3ph Quantity: RK 795 101-DC
Combiflex
IP15161-1 v1
Key switch for settings SEMOD130356-4 v6
Key switch for lock-out of settings via LHMI Quantity: 1MRK 000 611-A
Note: To connect the key switch, leads with 10 A Combiflex socket on one end must be used.
SEMOD130267-5 v7
Mounting kit Ordering number

Side-by-side mounting kit Quantity 1MRK 002 420-Z
Configuration and monitoring tools

M15042-3 v4 IP15162-1 v2
Front connection cable between LHMI and PC Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-CA
SEMOD131414-4 v3
LED Label special paper A4, 1 pc Quantity: 1MRK 002 038-CA
LED Label special paper Letter, 1 pc Quantity: 1MRK 002 038-DA
Manuals
M15161-3 v14
Note: One (1) IED Connect USB flash drive containing user documentation (Operation manual, Technical
manual, Installation manual, Commissioning manual, Application manual and Getting started guide),
Connectivity packages and LED label template is always included for each IED.
Rule: Specify additional quantity of IED Connect USB flash drive requested. Quantity: 1MRK 002 290-AE
164 ABB
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
User documentation
Rule: Specify the number of printed manuals requested
Application manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 376-UEN
ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 505 376-UUS
Technical manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 377-UEN
Commissioning manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 378-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1 IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 392-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2 IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 393-UEN
Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 394-UEN
Communication protocol manual, LON IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 395-UEN
Communication protocol manual, SPA IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 396-UEN
Communication protocol manual, DNP ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 511 391-UUS
Point list manual, DNP ANSI Quantity 1MRK 511 397-UUS
Operation manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 500 127-UEN
Installation manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 514 026-UEN
Engineering manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 398-UEN
ABB 165
1MRK 505 379-BEN C
Cyber security deployment guideline IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 399-UEN
Application guide, Communication set-up IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 382-UEN
Reference information
M2175-3 v4
For our reference and statistics we would be pleased to be provided with the following application data:
Country: End user:
Station name: Voltage level: kV
Related documents
GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v6 670 series manuals Document numbers
Documents related to RED670 Document numbers Operation manual IEC:1MRK 500 127-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 500 127-UUS
Application manual IEC:1MRK 505 376-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 505 376-UUS Engineering manual IEC:1MRK 511 398-UEN
Commissioning manual IEC:1MRK 505 378-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 505 378-UUS Installation manual IEC:1MRK 514 026-UEN
Product guide 1MRK 505 379-BEN
Communication protocol manual, 1MRK 511 391-UUS
Technical manual IEC:1MRK 505 377-UEN DNP3
Communication protocol manual, 1MRK 511 394-UEN
Type test certificate IEC:1MRK 505 379-TEN IEC 60870-5-103
ANSI:1MRK 505 379-TUS
IEC 61850 Edition 1

IEC 61850 Edition 2

LON

SPA
Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 397-UUS
Accessories guide IEC:1MRK 514 012-BEN

ANSI:1MRK 514 012-BUS
Cyber security deployment 1MRK 511 399-UEN

guideline
Connection and Installation 1MRK 513 003-BEN

components
Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN
Application guide, 1MRK 505 382-UEN

Communication set-up
166 ABB
167
—
ABB AB
Grid Automation Products
721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone: +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
abb.com/protection-control
1MRK 505 379-BEN
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved.

Specifications subject to change without notice.

1MRK505379-BEN C en Product Guide Line Differential Protection RED670 Version 2.2

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

1MRK505379-BEN C en Product Guide Line Differential Protection RED670 Version 2.2

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

—

Line differential protection RED670

1. Application..................................................................... 3 15. Monitoring................................................................... 47

1. Application Out of Step function is available to separate power system

Add binary I/O boards as required for the application when

Description of configuration A42

63 71 94 1→0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC

REM_VT 87L 3Id/I>

MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh MET I MET Isqi

27 2(3U<) 27 3U< 59 2(3U>) MET UN MET U

Other Functions available from the function library

81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos

Zpsl 78 Ucos 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control

60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85 85 85

Figure 1. Configuration diagram for configuration A42

Description of configuration B33

LINE1_VT LDL PSCH LT3C PDIF Σ

MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh

TIE_QA1 MET Isqi MET I 46 Iub> 50 3I>> 26 θ>

Other Functions available from the function library

WA2_QB6 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

87L 3Id/I> 87L 3Id/I> 87L 3Id/I> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos

QB2 Zpsl 78 Ucos 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 67N IN>

Figure 2. Configuration diagram for configuration B33

Description of configuration B42

LINE1_QB9 87L 3Id/I>

LINE1_VT L4C PDIF Σ

MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh

TIE_QA1 MET Isqi MET I 46 Iub> 50 3I>> 26 θ>

Other Functions available from the function library

WA2_QB6 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

24 U/f> 78 Ucos Zpsl 78 Ucos 3 Control

3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<)

Figure 3. Configuration diagram for configuration B42

Description of configuration C42

63 71 94 1→0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC

REM_VT 87L 3Id/I>

MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I< 21 Z<

MET W/Varh MET I MET Isqi

85 85 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>)

59 2(3U>) 27 2(3U<) 27 3U<

MET Usqi MET UN MET U

Other Functions available from the function library

81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

Figure 4. Configuration diagram for configuration C42

Main protection functions

Table 1. Example of quantities

2 = number of basic instances

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance 0–2

LDLPSCH 87L Line differential protection logic 0-1 1

LDRGFC 11REL Additional security logic for differential protection 0-1

ZMQPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic 0-5

ZDRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral 0-2

ZMCPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral 0-5

ZDSRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series 0-2

FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with 0-2

ZMHPDIS 21 Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic 0-5

ZMMPDIS, 21 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for 0-5